Malaysia Sewerage Industry Guideline Volume 4

First Edition
Volume IV
Sewage
Treatment Plants
Published by :
Suruhanjaya
Perkhidmatan
Air Negara (SPAN)
Ministry of
Energy, Water
and Communication
Malaysia
Foreword by the
CEO of SPAN
M
unicipal wastewater treatment technology in Malaysia has evolved through several eras. In the
past, only basic facilities were used, e.g. overhang latrines, pit privy, bucket systems and pour
flush systems. Some improvement were observed when more modern system like septic tank and
Imhoff tank systems were introduced into the country some 40 years ago. The municipal
wastewater treatment in Malaysia sees a significant improvement in the last three decades since the introduction
of new technologies in the form of oxidation ponds, aerated lagoons, activated sludge system, package systems
and a variety of mechanical plants into the country. However, sewage still remains as one of the major pollutants
of our inland waterways. In the 1900s, the emergent of new treatment technologies were mainly driven by the
basic need to treat the sewage so as to control waterborne diseases. Today, the environmental regulations are
becoming stringent with the increasing awareness toward sustainable environmental management. Allowable
effluent discharge limits are becoming lower globally. Public are also more educated and more alert on the needs
to preserve the environment. Hence the evolution of municipal wastewater treatment technologies now are even
more revolutionary and more rapid in order to meet the stricter regulators’ requirements and to compete in the
increasing competitive market.
While the nation moves towards achieving the status of a developed country, sustainability of our environment,
in particularly the Malaysian rivers and streams must be strengthened. With this vision in mind, the Sewerage
Services Department published its first edition of the guidelines for sewerage industry titled “Design and
Installation of Sewerage Systems” in January 1995. The main purpose of these guidelines is to assist the
developer and his designer to plan and design systems acceptable to the regulatory authorities which, in
turn speeds up the approval processes. The Guidelines has clearly guided the nation sewerage industry towards
achieving an improved sewerage system in the country. Subsequently, the Department further improvised the
Guidelines in its second edition titled “Guidelines for Developers” which comprise five volumes covering
specific topics.
As a continuation to the efforts by the Sewerage Services Department, the National Water Services Commission
undertake to revise and improvement the Guidelines for Developers. The product of the revision is “Malaysian
Sewerage Industry Guidelines” which also comprise five volumes. These new revisions incorporated valuable
knowledge gained by various stakeholders over a decade since the implementation of the first Guidelines for
Developers and upkeep with the aim towards sustainable environmental management.
Volume 1 - Sewerage Policy for New Developments

Volume 2 - Sewerage Works Procedures
Volume 3 - Sewer Networks and Pump Stations
Volume 4 - Sewage Treatment Plants
Volume 5 - Septic Tanks
Volume 4 is specifically designed to provide a prescriptive guide to the design and construction of sewage
treatment plants. This volume comes in 8 Sections as follows: Introduction and General Planning; Design
Overview; Effluent Discharge Standards and Requirements; Requirements for Physical Design;
Requirements for Individual Treatment Processes; Requirements for Ancillary Facilities; Special
Requirements; Package Sewage Treatment Plant. The implementation of these guidelines since 90’s has
undoubtedly achieved some levels of consistency in the design and construction of treatment plant
nationwide. Compliance to the treated effluent quality and sludge management has been elevated while the
operation and maintenance of the plants have improved significantly in terms of safety, health, operability
and robustness. Whilst the adherence to these guidelines is necessary, engineering discretion is also
required, especially for large treatment plants and/or plants with special situations. It is hoped that the
publication of the third edition of this Volume further improve the municipal wastewater treatment
facilities in this country.
Dato’ Teo Yen Hua

Chief Executive Officer
SPAN
© Copyright National Water Services Commission, Ministry of Energy, Water and
Communications, 2008
All rights reserved.
This publication is protected by copyright.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, distributed, transmitted, stored in a retrieval

system, or reduced to any electronic medium without the written authority of the Commissioner,
National Water Services Commission, Ministry of Energy, Water and Communications,.
National Water Services Commission and Registered Certifying Agencies employees are
permitted to copy and use the information in this publication, for internal purposes only.
Changes may be made periodically to the information herein.

TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
Section 1 Introduction and General Planning Requirements
1.1 Purpose of This Volume 1
1.2 Who Should Use This Volume 1
1.3 Related Reference Material 1
1.4 General Planning and Design Approval Requirements 2
1.5 Guidelines for Design Calculations 3
1.6 Guidelines for Drawings 5
Table 1.1 Recommended Population Equivalent 4

Figure 1.1 Typical Hydraulic Profile 7
Figure 1.2 Typical Process and Installation Diagram 8
Figure 1.4 Typical Mass Balance Diagram 10
Figure 1.5 Typical Electrical Single Line Diagram 10
Figure 1.3 Typical Process Flow Diagram 9
Section 2 Design Overview

2.1 Treatment Plant Classification 11
2.1.1 Classification by Biological Treatment Processes 11
2.1.2 Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity 12
2.2 Treatment System Selection / Design 12
2.2.1 General Selection Considerations 12
2.2.2 Design Stages 16
2.2.3 Detailed Design Criteria 16
2.3 Safety and Health Principles 19
2.3.1 General Safety 19
2.3.2 Structural Safety 20
2.3.3 Equipment and Electrical Safety 21
Table 2.1 Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity 12
i
Section 3 Sewage Characteristics and Effluent Discharge Requirements
3.1 Introduction 23
3.2 EQA Effluent Standards 23
3.2.1 Purpose of Effluent Standards 23
3.2.2 Interpretation of EQA Effluent Standards 23
3.3 Design Requirements to Achieve EQA Effluent Standards 24
3.3.1 Purpose of Design Requirements 24
3.3.2 Design Values 24
3.4 Sewage Pollutants Removal 25
3.4.1 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5) 25
3.4.2 Total Suspended Solid (TSS) 26
3.4.3 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) 26
3.4.4 Oil and Grease (O&G) 26
3.4.5 Nitrogenous Compound 27
3.4.6 Phosphorus Compound 27
3.5 Sludge Characteristics and Treatment Requirements 28
Table 3.1 Design Influent Values 24

Table 3.2 Design Effluent Values 25
Section 4 Requirements for Physical Design

4.1 Introduction 29
4.2 Treatment Plant Siting 29
4.2.1 Buffer Zones 29
4.2.2 Siting Criteria 31
4.2.3 Environmental Impact Assessment 31
4.2.4 Hazard and Operability Studies 32
4.3 Treatment Plant Sizing 32
4.3.1 Modular Units 32
4.3.2 Standby Units 33
4.3.3 Back-up Capacity 33
4.3.4 Design Flow 33
4.4 Land Area Requirements 34
4.4.1 Class 1 and 2 Plants 34
4.4.2 Mechanised Class 3 to 4 Plants 34
4.4.3 Aerated Lagoons and Stabilisation Ponds 34
ii
4.4.4 Imperfect Sites 34
4.4.5 Reduced Land Areas for STPs 35
4.5 Mechanical and Electrical Requirements 45
4.5.1 Mechanical Installation 45
4.5.2 Vibration 46
4.5.3 Noise 46
4.5.4 Safety Around Equipment 47
4.5.5 Motors, Controllers and Motor Starters 49
4.5.6 Power Supply Systems 50
4.5.7 Back-up Generator 51
4.5.8 Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies 52
4.5.9 Control Cabinets 52
4.5.10 Control Requirements 54
4.5.11 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems
(SCADA) 56
4.5.12 Early Warning System (EWS) 57
4.5.13 Instrumentation 57
4.5.14 Cables and Cabling Installation 58
4.5.15 Earthing and Lightning Protection 60
4.5.16 General Purpose Power 60
4.5.17 Manuals, Drawings and Labelling 60
4.5.18 Hazardous Areas 61
4.6 Material Requirements for STP Structures and Installations 61
4.6.1 Concrete and Reinforcement 62
4.6.2 Steel 63
4.6.3 Fibre Reinforced Plastic (FRP) 66
4.6.4 Aluminium 68
4.6.5 HDPE (High Density Polyethylene) 68
Table 4.1 Modulation Requirements 32

Table 4.2 Land Area Requirements for Class 1 36
Table 4.3 Land Area Requirement for Class 2 37
Table 4.4 Land Area Requirements for 37
Table 4.5 Land Area Requirements for 38
Table 4.6 Required Land Area for Stabilisation Pond and Aerated Lagoons39
Table 4.7 Required Process Instrumentation 58
iii
Figure 4.1 STP Land Area Requirements for Planning Layout Approval for
New Development 41
Figure 4.2 STP Land Area Requirements for Structure Plans 42
Figure 4.3 Guidelines For Buffer Zone 43
Figure 4.4 Plan View of Buffer Zone Requirements 44
Figure 4.5 Clear Working Space 49
Section 5 Requirements for Individual Treatment Processes

5.1 Introduction 69
5.2 Design of Primary Screens 72
5.2.1 Purpose of Primary Screens 72
5.2.2 Inlet Chamber 72
5.2.3 Design Requirements for Primary Screens 73
5.2.4 General Requirements 74
5.3 Design of Pump Stations 79
5.3.1 Purpose of Pump Stations 79
5.3.2 Design Requirements 79
5.4 Design of Secondary Screens 89
5.4.1 Purpose of Secondary Screens 89
5.5 Design of Grit and Grease Chambers 90
5.5.1 Purposes of Grit and Grease Chambers 90
5.5.3 Design Criteria 92
5.6 Design of Balancing Tanks 94
5.6.1 Purposes of Balancing Tanks 94
5.7 Design of Primary Sedimentation Stage 95
5.7.1 Purposes 95
5.8 Design of Biological Treatment Stage 97
5.8.1 Introduction 97
5.8.2 Conventional Activated Sludge System (CAS) 98
iv
5.8.3 Extended Aeration System (EA) 100
5.8.4 Rotating Biological Contactors (RBC) 103
5.8.5 Trickling Filter 105
5.8.6 Sequencing Batch Reactors (SBR) System 106
5.8.7 Design Requirements for Hybrid Systems 109
5.8.8 Design for Nutrient Removal for Sensitive Receiving
Water 109
5.9 Design of Secondary Clarifiers 111
5.9.1 Purpose 111
5.9.3 Multiple Hoppers 112
5.10 Disinfection 114
5.11 Design of Flow Measurement Devices 124
5.11.1 Purpose of Flow Measuring Devices 124
5.11.2 Design Requirements for Flow Devices 124
5.12 Sludge Holding, Treatment and Disposal 125
5.12.2 Sludge Strategy in General 126
5.12.3 Provision of Sludge Holding, Treatment and Disposal 127
5.12.4 Design Criteria 128
5.13 Tertiary Treatment 133
5.13.2 Design Requirement 133
Table 5.1 Requirement for Inlet Chamber 72

Table 5.2 Provision of Primary Screens 73
Table 5.3 Design Parameters for Primary Screens 74
Table 5.4 Recommended Design Parameters for Inlet Pump Stations 87
Table 5.5 Provision Requirement of Secondary Screens 89
Table 5.6 Design Parameters for Secondary Screens 90
Table 5.7 Provision Requirement of Grit and Grease Removal System 92
Table 5.8 Design Parameters for Grit Chambers 92
Table 5.9 Design Parameters for Grease Chambers 93
Table 5.10 Design Parameters for Balancing Tanks 95
Table 5.11 Design Parameters for Primary Sedimentation 97
Table 5.12 Design Parameters for Conventional Activated Sludge System 99
v
Table 5.13 Design Parameters for Extended Aeration 101
Table 5.14 Design Parameters for RBC Plants 104
Table 5.15 Design Parameters for Trickling Filter 106
Table 5.16 Design Requirements for SBR System 108
Table 5.17 Design Requirement for Biological Nutrient Removal System 109
Table 5.18 Design Parameters for Secondary Clarifiers 113
Table 5.19 Requirements for Disinfection Facility 115
Table 5.20 Design Guides for Disinfection with Ultra-Violet (UV) 119
Table 5.21 Design Guide for Disinfection with Hypochlorite 122
Table 5.22 Design Guide for Intermittent Disinfection 123
Table 5.23 Design Parameters for Flow Devices 125
Table 5.24 Sludge Generation Rates 128
Table 5.25 Design Parameters for Sludge Thickening 129
Table 5.26 Design Parameters for Aerobic and Anaerobic Digestion 130
Table 5.27 Recommended Design Parameters for Sludge Treatment 131
Figure 5.1 Typical Treatment Process Flow Chart 70
Figure 5.2 Typical Elements and Process Flow Diagram of a Sewage
Treatment Plant 71
Figure 5.3 Typical Drawing of Double Penstock 73
Figure 5.4 Quantities of Screenings Collected From Primary Screens 76
Figure 5.5 Typical drawing of screen chamber based on depth. (<5m for
different PE) 77
Figure 5.6 Typical drawing of screen chamber based on depth. (>5m for
different PE) 78
Figure 5.7 Typical Dimensions of Wet-well Submersible Pump Station 81
Figure 5.8 Typical Dimensions of Dry-well Submersible Pump Station 82
Figure 5.9 Typical details of wet-well pump station 85
Figure 5.10 Typical details of dry-well pump station 86
Figure 5.11 Fine Bubble Diffuser Air – Extended Aeration System 102
Figure 5.12 Oxidation Ditch Activated Sludge System 103
Figure 5.13 Deep Shaft Activated Sludge System 104
Figure 5.14 Rotating Biological Contactor (RBC) Systems 105
Figure 5.15 Typical Process Flow Diagram for Biological Nutrient Removal
System 110
vi
Figure 5.16 Schematic illustration of ultraviolet disinfection system with stilling
plate for flow conditioning and elongated weir for level control 115
Figure 5.17 Profile schematic of lamp modules relative to inlet and outlet
structure 116
Figure 5.19 Chemical-feed system schematic 116

Figure 5.20 Sludge Treatment and Disposal Strategy 132
Section 6 Requirements for Ancillary Facilities

6.1 Introduction 137
6.2 Water Supply and Wash Water 137
6.3 Mess Facilities and Ablutions 138
6.4 Roads and Access 140
6.5 Drainage 141
6.6 Fencing and Security 142
6.7 Beautification Zone and Landscape 147
6.8 Stores and Workshops 147
6.9 Spares 147
6.10 Yard Lighting 149
6.11 Sampling Facilities 150
6.12 Auto Restart Facilities 150
6.13 Safety Facilities 151
6.14 Doors 151
6.15 Fire Hydrant 151
6.16 Power Supply 152
6.17 Internal Sanitation (Toilet) 152
6.18 Lifting Requirement 152
6.19 Ventilation 153
6.20 Process Water 156
6.21 Aesthetic 156
6.22 Close Turfing 156
6.23 Standard Roofing and related requirement 156
6.24 Painting 157
vii
Table 6.1 Minimum Number of Recommended Water Stand Pipe and
Location 138
Table 6.2 Spare Part 148
Table 6.3 Numbers of Unit and Location of Compound Lighting 149
Table 6.4 Common ventilation rates 155
Table 6.5 Painting System Index – Colour Standards 158
Figure 6.1 Standard Details for Stand Pipe 138
Figure 6.2 Typical for Administration and Mess Facilities Building 139
Figure 6.3 Typical Details of Road Pavement 140
Figure 6.4 Typical Road Section of Site Road 140
Figure 6.5 Typical Drawing of Brickwall Fencing and Gate 143
Figure 6.6 Brickwall Fencing 144
Figure 6.7 Precast Fencing 145
Figure 6.8 Masonry Fencing 146
Figure 6.9 Typical Details of Compound Lighting 150
Figure 6.10 Typical Detail of Guard Rail 159
Figure 6.11 Typical Detail of Lifting Davit 160
Figure 6.12 Typical Detail of A-Frame Lifting Facilities 160
Section 7 Special Requirements

7.1 Temporary Treatment Plants 161
7.1.1 Definition 161
7.1.2 Category 1: Temporary Treatment Plant for Upgrading of
Facilities 161
7.1.3 Category 2: Temporary Plants for New Housing
Development 162
7.2 Treatment Plants Located Within Buildings 165
7.2.2 Specific Guidelines and Requirements 166
7.3 Fully Enclosed Treatment Plant 171
7.3.3 Specific Requirements 173
7.4 Covered and Buried Treatment Plants 179
7.4.2 General 180
viii
7.4.3 Specific Requirements for Covered or Buried Plants
under 5,000 PE or Less 180
7.5 Guidelines for Homestead Developments 183
7.5.1 Single Developments up to 30 Units or 150 PE in Total183
7.5.2 Single Developments Over 30 Units in Total with
Average Housing Density Greater Than Five Units per
Hectare 183
7.5.3 Single Developments Over 30 Units in Total with
Average Housing Density Less Than Five Units per
Hectare 183
7.6 Non-Compliance with Standards 184
7.6.2 Types of Incident’s that Can Cause Treatment Plant
Failure 184
7.7 Energy Saving 187
7.8 Recycle and Reuse 187
Section 8 Package Sewage Treatment Plant

8.1 Definition 189
8.2 Land Area Requirement 189
8.3 Design Requirement 190
8.4 Components of Package Sewage Treatment Plant 190
8.4.1 Layout, Piping and Arrangement of Prefabricated
Biological Treatment System 190
8.4.2 Prefabricated Tanks 191
8.4.3 Process Treatment Units/Components 191
8.5 Appurtenances 192
8.5.1 Piping system 192
8.5.2 Pumping System 193
8.5.3 Diffuser 194
8.5.4 Flow Distribution Chamber 194
8.5.5 Manhole Cover/Inspection Chamber Cover 194
8.5.6 Anchor System Loading 195
8.5.7 Landscaping 195
8.5.8 Odour Treatment 195
8.5.9 Ancillary Facilities 196
8.6 Marking and Labelling 196
ix
Table 8.1 Minimum Design Life Span of Package Sewage Treatment Plant
Components 190
Table 8.2 Recommended Number of Tanks and Effective Volume
Consideration for Various Unit Processes 191
Table 8.3 Technical Requirements of Pumping System 193
Table 8.4 Technical Requirements of Manhole Cover 194
x
APPENDICES
Appendix A Table
Table A.1 Contaminants of Concern in Sewage Treatment 198
Table A.2 Typical Composition of Untreated Domestic Sewage 199
Table A.3 Major Biological Treatment Processes Used for Sewage
Treatment 200
Table A.4 Interim National River Water Quality Standards for Malaysia 202
Table A.5 River Clarification 203
Table A.6 The Occupational Safety and Health Act 514, 1994 - Brief
Summary of Contents 204
Table A.7 Permissible limits for potentially toxic elements in soil 205
Table A.8 Options for disposal of Sludge and reuse of biosolids 206
Appendix B References
Malaysian Standards 207
British Standard 208
European Standard 209
ASTM Standard 211
AS Standard 212
Other Reference Materials 212
Other Guidelines in This Set 212
Appendix C Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA)

C-1 Introduction: Overview 213
C-2 Purpose 214
C-3 General Requirements 214
C-4 Architecture 214
C-5 SCADA Requirement 214
C-6 Operator Interface 215
C-7 Database 216
C-8 Alarm/Event Management 217
C-9 Historian 218
C-10 Graphical Trending 218
C-11 Report Format 218
xi
C-12 Security 219
C-13 Scripting 219
C-14 Interfaces 220
C-15 Distributed Server Architecture 220
C-16 Web Server 220
C-17 Digital Video Monitoring 220
C-18 Integrated Maintenance Management 221
C-19 Application Report 221
C-20 Application Programming Interface 222
C-21 User Documentation 222
C-22 Specifications and Sizing 222
Appendix D Duty and Standby Requirements

Table D.1 Duty and Standby Requirements for Activated Sludge Systems
(Utilising Diffused Aeration) 238
Table D.2 Duty and Standby Requirements for Activated Sludge Systems
(Utilising Mechanical Surface Aerator) 239
Table D.3 Duty and Standby Requirements for Rotating Biological Contactor
Systems 240
Table D.4 Duty and Standby Requirements for Trickling Filter Systems 241
Appendix E Glossary of Abbreviations

Glossary of Abbreviations 243
xii
Section 1
Introduction and General
Planning Requirements
Introduction and General Planning Requirements
1.1 Purpose of This Volume
This volume sets out the requirements of the National Water Services
Commission (SPAN) (referred to as the Commission in this document) for
the planning, design and construction of sewage treatment plants. This
volume contains the following:
a) An overview of considerations and criteria for sewage treatment

plant design.
b) Effluent discharge standards requirements and the capacity of
different sewage treatment processes to meet these standards.
c) Requirements for the siting and sizing of sewage treatment plants.
d) Requirements for each stage of sewage treatment.
e) Minimum requirements for facilities ancillary to a sewage
treatment plant.
f) Other special requirements for temporary treatment plants,
treatment plants within buildings, homestead developments and
exemptions for non-compliance with standards.
g) Requirements of sludge treatment process and disposal.
The owner must comply with the requirements set out in this volume when
submitting an application for approval to the Commissioner.
This volume does not cover any aspect other than Sewage Treatment Plant
requirements. All internal plumbing approvals need to be approved by
Local Authorities.
1.2 Who Should Use This Volume
This volume is primarily for owners, developers, consulting engineers and

Public Authorities whose developments include sewage treatment plants.
1.3 Related Reference Material
This volume does not cover all aspects of design and construction of
sewage treatment plants. Where information is not covered in this volume,
the designer shall follow the requirements given in MS 1228.
However, the information in this volume shall take precedence over

MS 1228 where similar aspects are covered in these documents or where
there is conflicting information between the two documents.
Sewage Treatment Plants Volume 4 1

The procedures for certification of sewerage services are given in the

Malaysian Sewerage Industry Guidelines (2nd Edition), Volume 2
Sewerage Works Procedures.
All Standards references adopted during this revision exercise are

compiled and given in Appendix B.
1.4 General Planning and Design Approval Requirements
The application procedures for sewage treatment plant approval shall

follow the requirements given in Volume 2 of these Guidelines. In
general, the application for approval of a treatment plant shall include:
a) Sufficient land area for the sewage treatment plant plus additional
area to allow for extensions to the plant, where necessary.
b) Land of suitable configuration should be provided.
c) Sufficient buffer zones.
d) The location of a sewage treatment plant in relation to a particular
catchment area. The plant unit processes shall be located at an
elevation which is not subject to flooding / wave action, or shall
otherwise be adequately protected against all flooding / wave
action.
e) Sufficient topographic features shall be included to indicate its
location in relation to streams and the point of discharge of the
treated effluent.
f) Schematic flow diagrams showing utility systems serving the plant
processes and the flow through various plant units.
g) Pipe works, including any arrangements for by-pass from
individual units. The direction of flow and the content in the pipes
shall also be clearly and permanently painted onto all exposed
piping works.
h) Hydraulic profiles showing the flow of sewage, supernatant liquor,
and sludge.
i) Location, dimensions and elevations of all existing and proposed
plant facilities.
j) Capacity of the effluent receiving drain / water course shall be able
to cater for additional discharge flow from the treatment plant.
k) Consideration for odour and noise mitigation and control through
good facility design, effective operation, containment, collection
and treatment.
2 Volume 4 Malaysian Sewerage

Industry Guidelines
l) Point of discharge of treated effluent (effluent outfall) and

elevations of high and low water levels of the receiving
watercourse to which the plant effluent is to be discharged.
m) Type, size, features, and operating capacity of all pumps, blowers,
motors and other mechanical devices together with manufacturer
catalogues.
n) Minimum, average and maximum hydraulic flows, velocities and
top water level in profiles.
o) Accessibility, landscaping and fencing.
p) Flow measurement facilities.
q) Materials, dimensions and specifications.
r) Ground conditions including levels, type, groundwater level and
safe bearing pressure of foundation.
s) Details of foundation and other structural design. Slope protection
works are required, where applicable.
t) All other components of the sewage treatment plant.
u) A technical report, which covers the ‘whole life cost’ evaluation of
the plant.
v) Process and instrumentation diagram.
w) Mass balance calculation
x) Clean and legible detailed drawings in standard format

y) Operation and Maintenance needs of the plant to be addressed at
the early planning stage.
z) Where required, an EA or EIA report is needed to identify, predict,
evaluate and communicate information concerning the adverse and
beneficial impacts of the proposed treatment plant.
aa) HAZOP requirement is necessary to identify the safety and
operability deficiencies in the design and operation of the treatment
plant.
1.5 Guidelines for Design Calculations
Design calculation for all unit processes shall be in sequence starting from
inlet works to biological treatments and sludge treatments as shown in
Figure 5.1. The calculation shall include:
a) Sizing of each unit processes and all mechanical equipment

involved.
b) Mass balance for overall system and each unit process.

c) Influent values.
d) Design influent and effluent values in compliance with Section
3.3.2.
e) Treatment plant shall be designed based on Design Flow.
f) Hydraulic profile across the treatment units to be indicated onto to
the drawings.
g) Each unit process must comply with the design parameters set in
Section 5.
h) Calculation of PE to be based on Table 1.1.
Table 1.1 - Recommended Population Equivalent
Type of Premises/Establishment Population Equivalent

(Recommended)
Residential 5 per house
Commercial: 3 per 100 m2 gross area
Includes offices, shopping complex,
entertainment/recreational centres,
restaurants, cafeteria, theatres
Schools/Educational Institutions:
- Day schools/Institutions 0.2 per student
- Fully residential 1 per student
- Partial residential 0.2 per non-residential student
1 per residential student
Hospitals 4 per bed
Hotels with dining and laundry 4 per room
facilities
Factories, excluding process water 0.3 per staff
Market (wet type) 3 per stall
Market (dry type) 1 per stall
Petrol kiosks/Service stations 15 per toilet
Bus terminal 4 per bus bay
Taxi terminal 4 per taxi bay
(Ref: Malaysian Standard 1228)

Industry Guidelines
Table 1.1 - Recommended Population Equivalent (Cont)
Type of Premises/Establishment Population Equivalent

(Recommended)
Mosque 0.2 per person
Church/Temple 0.2 per person
Stadium 0.2 per person
Swimming pool/Sports complex 0.5 per person
Public toilet 15 per toilet
Airport 0.2 per passenger bay
0.3 per employee
Laundry 10 per machine
Prison 1 per person
Golf course 20 per hole
(Ref: Malaysian Standard 1228)
1.6 Guidelines for Drawings

All drawings shall be of standard format and orientation. The drawings
required include:
a) Overall development plan showing the whole sewerage system and

plant location.
b) Site layout plan showing the arrangement of the plant, buffer zone,
internal set backs and all neighbouring developments.
c) Site layout plans showing all the process units, main pipe runs,
electrical conduit corridors, site services (water, drains, lighting,
other services), roads and paving, landscaping, buildings, fencing
and finished level contours (or spot levels). The set out and overall
dimensions of the plant shall also be shown.
d) Site elevations of the plant with at least one section through the
plant in each direction. These sections shall extend at least 30 m
from the plant boundary and include an indication of the
surrounding development (in block form only).
e) Process and instrumentation diagram (P&ID) showing all tanks,
pipes, channels, valves, mechanical equipment, instrumentation and
control loops. The P&ID can also act as a summary of the design.

It provides key details of each piece of equipment, tank, piping,

valves and instruments.
f) Hydraulic profile showing all hydraulic pathways through the plant
including bypasses. Information to be shown includes pipe sizes,
invert levels, flow velocities, tank coping level, top water level and
freeboard. Top water level and velocities at minimum flow,
average flow and peak flow under design load must be clearly
indicated.
g) Schematic flow diagrams and mass balances showing flow through
all process units in the plant.
h) General arrangement drawings of each unit process. These
drawings should be in sufficient details to clearly describe the
shape, size and function of each unit. The drawings should show
the structure of the unit, piping, valves and fittings,
instrumentation, mechanical and electrical equipment, buildings,
handrails, stairs, ladders, step irons, site services such as water and
lighting, adjoining paving, roadworks, fencing, drainage, etc.
Drawings of all items should show the elevations, plan view and
sectional view (horizontally and vertically), where applicable.
i) Details are required of any object that would affect the operation or
maintenance of the plant that is not covered by a standard drawing.
j) Required to use standard symbols and legend formats for all
drawings (Refer to Section 2 for standard symbol, typical P&ID
and hydraulic drawing)

Industry Guidelines
Figure 1.1 – Typical Hydrolic Profile
CL CL
TWL TWL
TWL
I.L. TWL
F.F.L. I.L. TWL TWL F.G.L. FLOOD LEVEL
F.G.L. F.G.L. F.G.L. I.L. F.G.L. F.G.L. F.G.L. TWL IN RECEIVING
WATERCOURS
I.L.
SECONDARY SCREEN NORMAL WATER
LEVEL
CLARIFIER DISTRIBUTION
CHAMBER OUTFALL MEASUREMENT
PRIMARY PUMPING VALVE CHLORINE CONTACT FLUME
SCREEN STATION CHAMBER TANK
BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT CLARIFIERS
2.0m
1.8m
1.6m
1.4m
1.2m
1.0m
0.8m
0.6m
0.4m
0.2m
FGL
-0.2m
-0.4m HIGHEST FLOOD WATER LEVEL

NORMAL WATER LEVEL
-0.6m
PRIMARY PUMPING VALVE CLARIFIER DISTRIBUTION CHLORINE OUTFALL MEASUREMENT
SECONDARY SCREEN BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT CHAMBER CLARIFIERS CONTACT TANK FLUME
SCREEN STATION CHAMBER
HYDRAULIC PROFILE
Sewage Treatment Plants Volume 4 Page 7

Figure 1.2 - Typical Process and Instrumentation Diagram
FE001 FE002
PI PI
GE001 GE002
GF001
GF002
GA001 GA002
FROM PRELIMINARY LC LD001 LD002 LC

TREATMENT
PTS L001 50 DI
PTS L003 50 DI
P TS L004 100 DI
PTS L002 100 DI
M M
XXX001 D AD001 XXX001 D PN001 XXX001 D PN002 XXX001 D AD002

FE004
BALANCING TANK PI
GF003
PC TC GE003 GA004
M M M
APR L002 80 GI APR L 001 100 GI
GF007 FE003 FG001

XXX001 D BA001
GA003
GF001 GF002 GF003
LD 003
LC LC
FB001 DOI
M LD 004
XXX001 D JA001
APR L005 50 G I
AP R L004 50 GI
AP R L003 50 GI
M M M
XXX001 D AC001 XXX001 D AC002 XXX001 D AC003

FE006
SEQUENCING BATCH REACTOR NO. 1 PI
G F004
GE004 GA006
PC TC
M M M
APR L007 80 GI APR L006 100 GI
GF008 FE005 FG002
XXX001 D BA002
GA005
GF 004 GF005 GF006
LD005
FB002 DOI LC
LC
M LD006
Note:
Code numbering system for items identification:
XXX001 D JA002 1) Process equipment no. 3) Valve tag no.
XXX001 A PA001 XXX001 L005 GD001
APR L011 50 GI
A PR L010 50 GI
APR L009 50 G I
Valve sequential no .
Equipment sequential no. Valve type
Type of equipment Pipeline sequential no .
Unit process Plant identification no .
M M M
Plant identification no.
2) Pipeline no. 4) Instruments no.
RAS L003 150 DI XXX001 A FA001
Pipe material Instrument sequential no.
XXX001 D AC004 XXX001 D AC005 XXX001 D AC006 Pipe size Instrument type
Pipeline sequential no. Unit process
SEQUENCING BATCH REACTOR NO. 2 Fluid in pipeline Plant identification no.

Industry Guidelines
Figure 1.3 Typical Process Flow Diagram

Figure 1.4 – Typical Mass Balance Diagram

S IN G L E L IN E L A Y O U T D IA G R A M F O R A IR B L O W E R S IN G L E L IN E L A Y O U T D IA G R A M F O R
M O T O R S E .Q P U M P S A N D S S T P U M P R A W S E W A G E S U B M E R S IB L E P U M P
NO.1 (2.4kW) Using 4c x 2.5mm ARM Cable
NO.2 (2.4kW) Using 4c x 2.5mm ARM Cable

RAW SEWAGE SUBMERSIBRE PUMP
RAW SEWAGE SUBMERSIBLE PUMP

Using 4c x 2.5mm ARM Cable

Air blower motor no.1 (3.7kW)
Air blower motor no.2 (3.7kW)
Using 2 x 1.5mm sq. PVC

EQ Pump no. 1 (0.6kW)
EQ Pump no. 2 (0.6kW)

13A Socket Outlet
To Control Circuit
TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
D IS T R IB U T IO N B O X F O R
L IG H T IN G A N D P O W E R
TO COMPOUND LIGHTING (2 nos)

TO 36W FLOUERECENT LIGHT
D S D S
TO 13A SOCKET OUTLET

E. STOP
D S
TOR
TOR
TOR
TOR
TOR
TOR
PSR
DOL
DOL
DOL
DOL
SPARE
A
A
20A SPN
20A TPN
20A TPN
16A TPN
16A TPN
6A SPN
DOL
DOL
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
MCB
TPN20A
TPN20A
SPN6A
MCB
MCB
MCB
R Y B
24T
3x5A
0 -5 0 0 V
R Y B
S /s w
3x5A
10A
20A
20A
6A
0 -4 0 A 0 -5 0 0 V
S /s w S /s w
PSR PHASE SEQUENCE 0 -3 0 A

R E LA Y S /s w
4 0 /0 .3 A 4 p R C C B 4 0 /0 .3 A 4 p R C C B 4 0 /0 .1 A
2P R CCB
E E
40A TP N 10KA M C C B 30A TP +N 10KA M C C B S P +N 30K A
10 KA M CCB
U S IN G 4 C x 1 6 m m P V C /S W A P V C A R M . C A B L E U S IN G 4 C x 1 0 m m P V C /S W A /P V C A R M . C A B L E U S IN G 2 C x 6 m m P V C /S W A /P V C A R M . C A B L E
40A TP+N 30A TP +N 30A SP+N

MCCB MCCB MCCB
R Y B
6A 0 -50 0V
V .s .s w
3 x 6 0 /5 A 0 -6 0 A
V .s .s w
PSR PHASE SEQUENCE

R E LAY
6 3 /0 .3 A 4 p R C C B
E
6 0 A T P + N 2 5 K A (4 P O L E ) M C C B
S IN G L E L IN E L A Y O U T D IA G R A M F O R
415 V S U P P LY M A IN S W IT C H B O A R D
3 PHASE
T N B M E T E R IN G
PANEL
M U L T IC O R E A R M O U R E D
C ABLE TO
T N B R E Q U IM E N T
IN C O M IN G S U P P L Y F R O M
M A IN D B 4 1 5 V
Figure 1.5 - Typical Electrical Single Line Diagram

INFLOW PARTICULARS
Q =
BOD = 10% SS to be removed
SS = PHYSICAL TREATMENT
1) PRIMARY SCREEN
2) SECONDARY SCREEN
Qi =
BOD = Qe =
SS = Q = Qi + Qr + Qw
BOD = BOD =
SS = SECONDARY CLARIFIER
SS =
AERATION TANK
OVERFLOW SS CONC = OUTLET
MLSS = BOD =
Qr + Qw =
Qr, Xr BOD =
Qr = X Qi = SS =
BOD =
SS =
AEROBIC DIGESTED
SLUDGE HOLDING TANK
Qw =
BOD =
SS =
1%DS =
SLUDGE THICKENER
Qw =
BOD =
SS =
4%DS =
Qw OVERFLOW =
Sludge to be pumped to Sand Drying Bed

For Dewatering to 25% Dry Solid

Industry Guidelines
Section 2
Design Overview
Design Overview
2.1 Treatment Plant Classification
2.1.1 Classification by Biological Treatment Processes
The microorganisms in sewage treatment can be grown in a form of fixed

film, suspension or a combination of both. Hence, biological treatment
processes for sewage treatment works can be classified under one of the
following headings:
a) Attached Growth Processes

b) Suspended Growth Processes
c) Combined Processes (Hybrid)
2.1.1.1 Attached Growth Processes
In an attached growth process, the active microorganisms grow and attach

on the mobile or immobile medium (rock or plastic) that is in contact with
sewage. The surface area of the biomass is used as the practical measure of
the total organism activity. Types of attached growth processes include:
a) Trickling Filter (TF)

b) Rotating Biological Contactor (RBC)
c) Submerged Biological Contactor (SBC)
d) Fluidised Bed
e) Packed Bed Reactor
2.1.1.2 Suspended Growth Processes
In a suspended growth process, active microorganisms remain in

suspension in the sewage and their concentration is usually related to
mixed liquor suspended solid (MLSS) or mixed liquor volatile suspended
solid (MLVSS). This system was developed as a result of studies that
showed that if sewage is aerated over a long period of time, the organics in
the sewage are removed by the active microorganisms grow during the
process.
Types of suspended growth processes include:
a) Waste Stabilisation Pond System

b) Aerated Lagoon
c) Conventional Activated Sludge (CAS)
d) Extended Aeration (EA)

Design Overview
e) Oxidation Ditch (OD)

f) Deep Shaft (DS)
g) Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR)
h) Any other treatment processes which comply with the design
principles of one of the above processes.
2.1.1.3 Hybrid Processes - Attached Growth with Suspended Growth
Recent developments in sewage treatment technology include the

combination of various attached growth and suspended growth processes
to obtain the best performance and most economical treatment of sewage.
One of the advantages of Hybrid Process is the process combines the

stability and resistance to shock loads of an attached growth process and
the capability to produce high-quality effluent of an suspended growth
system.
Hybrid processes can be used to upgrade existing attached growth and

suspended growth process, in particularly plants with high suspended
solids in the final effluent due to poor solids settlement in the final
clarifier.
2.1.2 Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity
Sewage treatment plants are also classified in accordance to the design

capacity in terms of population equivalent (PE). Table 2.2 tabulates 4
clarifications to be adopted.
Table 2.1 - Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity
Classification PE
Class 1 ≤1000
Class 2 1,001 – 5,000
Class 3 5,001 – 20,000
Class 4 > 20,000
2.2 Treatment System Selection / Design
2.2.1 General Selection Considerations
The following factors must be considered when selecting a sewage

treatment process:

Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
Process The applicability of a process is evaluated on the

basis of past experience, data from full-scale plants
and pilot data from treatment plant studies. If new
or unusual conditions are encountered, pilot-plant
studies are necessary.
Flow Range The selected process should be matched to the

expected flow range.
Flow Variation Most unit operation and processes work best with a
constant flow rate, although some variation can be
tolerated. If the flow variation is too great, flow
equalisation may be necessary.
Influent Sewage The characteristics of the influent will affect the

types of processes to be used and the requirements
for their proper operation.
Inhibiting Identify the constituents present that may be

Constituents inhibitory, and the conditions they are in.
Climatic Constraints Temperature affects the rate of reaction of most

treatment processes.
Reaction Kinetics Reactor sizing is based on the governing reaction

and Reactor kinetics. Data for kinetic expressions are usually
Selection derived from experience, literature and results of
pilot-plant studies.
Performance Performance is usually measured in terms of

effluent quality, which must be consistent with the
given effluent discharge requirements.
Treatment Residuals The types and amounts of solid, liquid and gaseous
residuals produced must be known or estimated.
Sludge Handling In many cases, a treatment method should be

Constraints selected only after the sludge processing and
handling options have been explored.

Design Overview
Environmental Nutrient requirements must be considered for

Constraints biological treatment processes. Environmental
factors, such as the prevailing winds and wind
directions, may restrict the use of certain processes,
especially where odours may be produced.
Chemical Classify chemicals and amounts that must be

Requirements committed for a long period of time for the
successful operation of the unit operation or
process.
Energy The energy requirements, as well as probable future

Requirements energy costs, must be known if cost-effective
treatment systems are to be designed.
Other Resource Identify additional resources that must be

Requirements committed to the successful implementation of the
proposed treatment system using the unit operation
or process in question.
Reliability Consider the long-term record of the reliability of

the unit operation or process under consideration.
Complexity Evaluate the complexity of the process to operate

under routine conditions and under emergency
conditions such as shock loadings, as well as the
level of training the operator must have to operate
the process.
Ancillary Processes Identify the required support process and the effect
on the effluent quality, especially when they
become inoperative.
Compatibility The unit operation or process shall be used

successfully with existing facilities, plant
expansion and modifications.
Odour and Noise Odour and noise pollution should be minimised to

the lowest possible level.
Aesthetics The selected treatment process should aesthetically

suit the development site.

Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
Safety and The chosen treatment process shall be designed

Operability with utmost care to facilitate safe operations at all
times as well as to incorporate safety features for
the protection of operators. See Section 2.3.
Land Requirements A more compact plant component may perform

equally well to a component taking up more land
and thus would be preferential, provided there was
no significant component cost differences.
Ease of Operation This will dictate whether plant has to be

and Maintenance continuously or intermittently operated and whether
skilled or relatively unskilled personnel would be
required to carry out the operations and
maintenance works.
Modulation Modulation refers to the ability of process units to

be expanded in tandem with flow increases.
Modulation minimises the time that the plant sits
idle before utilisation and lowers initial capital
outlay.
Standardisation This brings about economics on design effort,

material procurement, quality checks, spares and
maintenance costs.
Adaptability Adaptability refers to the ability to readily upgrade

or uprate the performance of a treatment plant with
relatively minor extra works.
Sludge Management This is an important aspect that needs careful

evaluation. Treatment systems that minimise waste
sludge production, and which produce a relatively
stable sludge should be given preference. See
Section 5.12
Overall Cost This will include considerations of capital,

operation and maintenance costs. Spare parts costs
related to maintenance can be hidden costs that also
need consideration, particularly where there may be
long time delays obtaining parts or specialist inputs
are required.
2.2.2 Design Stages

Design Overview
The design of a sewage treatment plant comprises the following stages:
Process Design In this stage, a suitable sequence of processes are

selected to meet stipulated final effluent requirements
for the plant concerned.
Functional In this stage, calculation of capacities required are

Design conducted for all major units, channels, pumps and
pipework and also definition of control requirements.
These include designs for hydraulic, organic and solid
loadings.
Detailed Design In this stage, structural design of units and channels,

detailing of pipelines, fittings and control valves, and
selection of mechanical, electrical and control
equipment are conducted.
2.2.3 Detailed Design Criteria
For the following characteristics and requirements of a treatment plant, the

designer needs to consider a number of detailed design criteria:
a) Biochemical characteristics
b) Physical characteristics
c) Hydraulic characteristics
d) Mechanical & engineering requirements
e) Structural requirements
f) Constructional characteristics
2.2.3.1 Biochemical Characteristics
These involve the consideration of the following parameters:
a) Chemical characteristics of sewage

b) Good activity between microorganisms and waste materials
c) Optimal substrate concentration
d) Operational stability (half-life and activity decay profile)
e) Availability of suitable nutrients
f) Maintenance of favourable environment
g) Effect of filamentous growth & sludge bulking
h) Effect of dissolved oxygen
i) Productivity in lifetime usage

Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
j) Minimum and maximum residence times

k) By-product formation
l) pH and temperature sensitivity
m) Storage stability
n) Reactor effluent quality-composition, colour, odour, etc.
o) Sludge production and frequency of desludging
p) Effective material balance analysis
q) Development of biochemical kinetic coefficient through pilot
plants
2.2.3.2 Physical Characteristics
These involve the examination of:
a) Particle shape and size distribution

b) Dry and wet bulk density
c) Swelling behaviour
d) Compressibility
e) Cohesion and particle attrition
f) Settlement
g) Floc formation
h) Settling velocity and sedimentation
2.2.3.3 Hydraulic Characteristics
a) Hydraulic velocities in all unit processes

b) Mode of flow, upflow versus downflow
c) Axial dispersion and channelling
d) Pressure drop and head loss through plant
e) Residence time distribution and retention time
f) Stratification
g) Length to width ratio
h) Minimum velocity for onset of fluidisation
i) Weir loadings
j) Overflow rate

Design Overview
2.2.3.4 Construction Characteristics
a) Ground conditions and soil characteristics

b) Land availability
c) Type of plant depending on density and type of community to be
served
d) Distance to nearest habitation
e) Delivery and construction time
f) Recommended maintenance requirements
g) Start-up time and procedure
h) Noise levels
i) Technical capability to construct, operate and maintain the system
2.2.3.5 Structural Requirements
a) Wall, slab, beams, columns and structure for sewage treatment

plant shall be in reinforced concrete.
b) Wall shall have minimum thickness of 225mm.
c) Special foundation shall be provided where necessary.
d) Proper jointing to prevent breakage and leakage.
e) Water retaining and slope protection where applicable.
2.2.3.6 Mechanical & Electrical Requirements

a) The design shall simplify the equipment required, control system,
maintenance and operational procedures, while fulfilling the
intended performance and standard of service.
b) Equipment selected shall be from manufacturers (and models)
approved by the Commission.
c) Equipment, cable and cabling design and installation shall follow
IEE and TNB requirements.
d) Foundations shall be structurally designed and anchored to
withstand all loads imposed by the equipment. Reinforced concrete
foundations are preferred.
e) Joints shall be provided in all piping to allow removal of
equipment, meters, valves and other special items without causing
dismantling of the pipeline.

Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
f) Equipment shall be equipped with safety protection (i.e. emergency

stop button, warning signage & etc.). See Section 4.5.
g) Pipeworks shall be neatly arranged and properly supported.
h) Appropriate type of control system provided for the treatment
plant. See Section 4.5.
i) Construction materials to be protected against corrosion due to high
humidity.
j) Earthing and protection against lightning.
k) System manuals, plant function diagrams, electrical system,
electrical circuit and instrument loop diagrams shall be provided
before the plant is pre-commissioned.
l) Detailed and shop drawing for equipment, instrumentation and
cable & cabling shall be provided.
2.3 Safety and Health Principles
Throughout the design, construction, commissioning, operation and

maintenance stages of a project, the following safety principles shall apply:
2.3.1 General Safety
a) Malaysian Safety and Health legislations, standards and procedures

under Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 1994, Factories
and Machinery Act 1967 and etc. shall be followed.
b) Workforce, contractors, visitors and the public shall be safeguarded
against hazards, risk of serious injury and disease.
c) Adequate training shall be made available for the use of all related
equipment.
d) Appropriate training for end users to be identified and stipulated in
construction and procurement documents.
e) Appropriate responsibilities to be assigned throughout each stage
of a project.
f) Safety consciousness to be promoted by effective internal
communication, signs and media.
g) Safety performance shall be easily audited during operation and
maintenance.
h) All accidents or potential serious incidents to be reported and
investigated.
i) Risk assessment to be undertaken at design of projects and
selection stage of procurement.

Design Overview
j) Safety information and operating documents to be provided by

suppliers.
k) Emergency contact list, showing telephone numbers of key
personnel and emergency services during office hours and out of
office hours, to be circulated to all parties involved in a project.
l) Plant (certain sized) should be provided with Emergency Response
Plan (ERP)
m) All treatment plants, installation and construction sites, shall be
provided with perimeter fencing adequate to protect the public
from entry. All fencing shall be securely fixed and inspected.
n) All treatment plants, installations and construction sites shall have
adequate warning signs at or near the perimeter.
o) Access to construction sites shall be controlled to prevent
unauthorised access.
2.3.2 Structural Safety
a) Safe access to all working areas to be provided.

b) Routine requirement to enter confined spaces to be eliminated,
where practicable.
c) Any confined space requiring routine person entry, which contains
sewage, sludge or other foul water, to be ventilated.
d) Concrete slabs over wet wells, tanks and chambers shall have
double steel reinforcing.
e) Lifting eyes and bolts for slabs to be stainless steel or any other
durable and non-corrosive material.
f) Protection against falling (i.e. handrail, kick plate and toe plate) to
be provided.
g) Within plants and installations, all wells, sumps, channels,
chambers, tanks, etc. containing any liquid shall be covered, walled
or railed.
h) Major hazards to be identified and posted on site.
i) Protection and counter measures against spillage of dangerous
chemicals to be provided.
j) Permanent staircase shall be provided at inlet sumps, inlet wells,
inlet chambers and dry wells. Steps and riser shall follow UBBL
Standard.
k) Adequate lifting facility shall be provided for heavy equipment,
which requires maintenance work.

Industry Guidelines
Design Overview
l) Blower room shall not share common wall and foundation with the
control and genset room
2.3.3 Equipment and Electrical Safety
a) Electrical equipment and controls to be protected from

unauthorised access.
b) Individual electrical drives to be capable of being isolated and
locked off.
c) Electrical motors should be rated as continuous run.
d) Junction boxes for submersible pumps and float controls shall be
above floor level outside the wet well.
e) All electrical equipment in sumps, wet wells, inlet channels, inlet
chambers, sited below coping level to be explosion proof.
f) Lighting, appropriate to the needs of the end user, to be provided in
working areas.
g) Registration of electrical / motorised equipment with Department
of Safety and Health (DOSH).
h) Emergency stop button / isolator shall be provided for each
equipment.
i) Power driven machinery to be guarded.
j) All equipment to be regularly checked and prominently marked
accordingly

Design Overview
22(this page is intended blank) Volume 4 Malaysian Sewerage

Industry Guidelines
Section 3
Sewage Characteristics and
Effluent Discharge
Requirements
Sewage Characteristics and Effluent Discharge Requirements
3.1 Introduction
The Environmental Quality Act (EQA) 1974 specifies two standards for
effluent discharge: Standard A for discharge upstream of any raw water
intake, and Standard B for discharge downstream of any raw water intake.
The current Third Schedule of the Environmental Quality Act 1974, under
the Environmental Quality (Sewage and Industrial Effluents) Regulations,
1979, regulations 8 (1), 8 (2) and 8 (3) has been revisited and the
Department of Environment has proposed 8th Schedule for the Act which
stipulate effluent discharge limits for parameters specific to domestic
wastewater. The effluent discharge limits in 8th Schedule are summarised
in Table 3.2. All sewage treatment plants design shall take into
consideration of the 8th Schedule and shall comply with the proposed
limits.
3.2 EQA Effluent Standards
3.2.1 Purpose of Effluent Standards
Effluent standards are used to regulate the disposal of effluent from

sewage treatment plants to any receiving waters. The regulation of such
discharges will protect receiving waters and their associated aquatic
ecosystems, and will also protect public health from the harmful effects of
untreated sewage.
The need for these standards has been influenced by the fact that sewage
discharges contribute a significant amount of the biodegradable organic
matters, suspended solids and ammoniacal nitrogen to the nation's
waterways.
3.2.2 Interpretation of EQA Effluent Standards
The EQA effluent standards have the following characteristics:
a) They represent maximum or absolute values which may not be

normally exceeded. For this reason, EQA effluent standards are
also referred to as absolute standards
b) Measurement of effluent quality is to be taken using a single grab
sample rather than a time averaged composite sample
c) Generally, effluent standards do not allow the flexibility for them
to be compromised through dilution and the assimilative capacity
of receiving water.

3.3 Design Requirements to Achieve EQA Effluent

Standards
3.3.1 Purpose of Design Requirements
The purpose of design requirements is to ensure that the effluent standards

can be met under the normal operations of a sewage treatment plant. The
quality of effluent from a sewage treatment plant is expected to vary due to
the natural variability in the flows and loads into the plant. Therefore, the
design effluent parameter shall be less than the required effluent standards
to ensure that, when the plant is under normal operation, any grab sample
of effluent will comply with the consent EQA effluent standards.
3.3.2 Design Values
Typical composition of untreated domestic sewage is given in Table A.2,

while Table 3.1 tabulates the design influent values to be adopted in the
design of a treatment plant.
Table 3.1 - Design Influent Values
Value Value
Parameter
(g/capita.d) (mg/l)
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5) 56 250
Suspended Solids (SS) 68 300
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) 113 500
Total Nitrogen (TN) 11 50
Ammoniacal nitrogen (AMN) 7 30
Total Phosphorus (TP) 2 10
Oil and Grease (O&G) 11 50
These design values allow for transient reductions in treatment efficiency,

due to periodic plant maintenance and unforeseen high impulse of
hydraulic and organic loadings on sewage treatment process units. All
sewage treatment plants shall be designed to produce final effluents with
BOD5, SS, COD, O&G and AMN values less than or equal to the design
effluent values. This is to ensure a high degree of consistent compliance
with the required effluent standards. The effluent E-Coli compliance is
subject to the sensitivity of the receiving watercourse and of the
Commission’s directive.

Industry Guidelines
Table 3.2 - Design Effluent Values
Effluent Discharge to
Effluent Discharge to Rivers / Stream
Stagnant Water Bodies*
Parameter Standard A Standard B Standard A Standard B
Absolut
e Design Absolute Design Absolute Design Absolute Design
BOD5 20 10 50 20 20 10 50 20
SS 50 20 100 40 50 20 100 40
COD 120 60 200 100 120 60 200 100
AMN 10 5 20 10 5 2 5 2
Nitrate
Nitrogen 20 10 50 20 10 5 10 5
Total
Phosphorus N/A N/A N/A N/A 5 2 10 5
O&G 5 2 10 5 5 2 10 5
Notes:
NA = Not Applicable
All values in mg/L unless otherwise stated.
* Stagnant Water Bodies refer to enclosed water bodies such as lakes, ponds and slow
moving watercourses where dead zone occur
In cases where treatment plant discharge capacity is higher than the

receiving river flow rates, the final effluent quality has to be designed to
ensure minimal environmental impact.
3.4 Sewage Pollutants Removal
3.4.1 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5)
BOD5 is used to measure the biodegradable organic fraction in raw

sewage. Based on standard BOD5 measurement, the oxygen demand
measured is usually influenced by the following three (3) phenomena:
a) Oxygen demand by breakdown of soluble carbonaceous matter

b) Oxygen demand by breakdown of suspended particulate
carbonaceous matter
c) Oxygen demand by oxidation of ammonia to nitrate by nitrifying
bacteria present in the effluent sample
After undergoing biological treatment in the secondary reactor, residual

soluble carbonaceous BOD5 matter present in the effluent reduces in

concentration to below 15 mg/l. Subsequently, nitrifying bacteria

populations tend to grow rapidly feeding on ammonia which is present in
the partially treated sewage. Nitrification may not be complete at levels of
5 mg/l of residual soluble carbonaceous biodegradable matter. It depends
on whether sufficient oxygen is available for the oxidation of ammonia to
nitrate. Hence, all BOD5 measurements shall adopt nitrification inhibition
step to ensure that the carbonaceous oxygen demand is reflected accurately
in the overall BOD5 measurement.
3.4.2 Total Suspended Solid (TSS)
Sewage contains solid materials that can settle at the bottom and also give
impact on the benthic life. They can also appear in suspension solids form
that can increase turbidity and affect the light availability for aquatic life.
The amount of solids in sewage is usually measured as "total suspended
solids" or TSS. The desired solid removal in sewage treatment plants
should not exceed the absolute TSS discharge limit of 50mg/l and 100mg/l
for Standard A and Standard B, respectively.
To ensure effluent consistently complies with DOE’s Effluent Limits,

provisions must be made to allow for future incorporation of a flocculator
in the clarifier. This will enhance clarification performance. Chemical
(polymer) can also be added in flocculation clarifiers to further enhance
solids settlement in the clarifiers. Otherwise, a dual media filtration system
following conventional secondary clarifiers can also be used to ensure that
TSS concentration of 20mg/l to 40mg/l is consistently achieved.
3.4.3 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)
COD content reflects the chemically oxidized organic matter. Hence, it

includes refractory fractions of organic matter as well as reduced inorganic
constituents present in the wastewater. The COD measurement offers
quick estimate of carbonaceous material compared to conventional BOD
measurement. Additionally, high COD reflects inert reduced inorganic
elements and also unbiodegradable organic that comes from industrial
contamination. Based on the bi-substrate hypothesis, COD fractions
comprising of readily biodegradable, slowly biodegradable and
unbiodegradable estimates are adopted in advanced modeling for STP
design. Such advanced modeling takes into consideration the treatment
process requirements of different COD fractions as it varies in
susceptibility to microbial respiration and degradation.
3.4.4 Oil and Grease (O&G)
Oil and grease that is detected in domestic sewage refers to the fraction of
organic matter that is soluble in organic solvents such as hexane.

Industry Guidelines
The composition comprise primarily of wax, edible oils and fatty matter of
animal or vegetable origins. Oil and grease (mixture of tri, di and mono-
glycerides) in its liquid form results in floatable scum formation in
treatment systems whilst its solid form causes the clogging of systems.
Oil and grease is separated from raw sewage by provision of grease

chambers (be it manual or mechanized scum skimmer removal) at primary
treatment stage. Removal at the primary stage is essential to prevent
interference of oil particles on biological reactions in the secondary
treatment. It also prevents undesirable organic load of extremely slow
biodegradable constituents unto aerobic systems. Such first line oil and
grease removal protects against contamination in the treatment plant as
well as in the receiving water.
3.4.5 Nitrogenous Compound
Removal of nitrogenous compounds needs to be considered in STP design.

These compounds found in various forms (ammonia or ammoniacal
nitrogen, nitrate nitrogen and nitrite nitrogen) could be detrimental to
natural water bodies and potable consumption. Total organic nitrogenous
compounds in raw sewage typically comprise of nitrogen in the form of
proteins, amino acids and urea along with ammoniacal nitrogen.
Ammoniacal nitrogen results from the decomposition of organic nitrogen
particularly from hydrolysis of urea. Total Kjedhal Nitrogen (TKN)
analysis determines the organic nitrogen and the ammoniacal nitrogen
fractions.
There are two main biological processes for removing nitrogenous

compounds, namely the assimilation of ammonia-nitrogen into the
microbial biomass and the nitrification-denitrification process. The latter
involves two conversion steps. Firstly, nitrification followed by
denitrification by microbial heterotrophs that convert nitrates into nitrogen
gas. Nitrification comprises two-step oxidation of ammonia-nitrogen into
nitrate by nitrifying bacteria. All treatment systems shall provide full
nitrification and denitrification in the secondary biological reactors with
sufficient air supply to facilitate nitrification. This will ensure that effluent
discharge complies with the required discharge limits.
3.4.6 Phosphorus Compound
The constituents of total phosphorus compounds in raw sewage are

organically bound phosphorus and inorganic phosphorus (orthophosphates
and polyphosphates).
Some fractions of the essential phosphorus nutrients from the influent will
be assimilated for microbial growth during secondary biological treatment.
However, excessive phosphorus nutrient will occur when above the
assimilated with stagnant receiving water bodies (e.g. ponds), which will

result in nutrient enrichment and produce harmful algae blooms. Hence,

the design for sewage treatment plant effluent that discharges into stagnant
water bodies should take into considerations the impact of excess
phosphorus contamination.
3.5 Sludge Characteristics and Treatment Requirements
Sludge treatment and management are as important as the sewage

treatment to minimise impacts to the environment. Sludge produced from
treatment process is usually in liquid form, which typically contains 0.25
to 4.0% of solids, depending on the type of treatment process being used. It
also contains grease, fats, organic and inorganic chemicals. High
concentrations of certain components will determine the type of sludge
treatment process to be used.
Sludge shall be thickened, stabilized, conditioned and dewatered before it

is finally disposed off in accordance to requirement stipulated by
Department of Environment. The dried sludge must attain a minimum of
20% dry solid content before off-site disposal. Close attention is required
when planning and designing sludge treatment processes to ensure biosolid
to be disposed do not contain any harmful substance that will affect the
environment. Additionally, stabilization process should be designed to
reduce any potential presence of microbial pathogens. Options of ultimate
disposal include landfill and land application.

Industry Guidelines
Section 4
Requirements for Physical Design
4.1 Introduction
The induced physical, chemical and biological reactions that occur in a

sewage treatment plant (STP) lead to waste emissions in the following
forms:
a) gases and vapours, some of which contain obnoxious compounds,

including bacteria and viruses
b) noise
c) odour
d) vibration
e) unwanted solid matter
f) undesirable by-product liquors containing highly concentrated
pollutants
g) heat
As such, a sewage treatment plant can degrade the amenity of its

surroundings, especially in residential areas.
Careful consideration of siting is required to minimise nuisance to the

public. Sufficient land needs to be set aside during the planning stage to
take into account regional treatment plant development and the proper
sewerage planning for housing, commercial and institutional
developments.
This section sets out the important factors and considerations associated
with the identification of proper sites to locate sewage treatment plants.
Typical workflows in the site for sewage treatment plants are illustrated in
Figures 4.1 and 4.2. It also addresses the selection of appropriate treatment
concepts and sufficient land area requirements for treatment plants in
relation to the effluent standards.
4.2 Treatment Plant Siting
4.2.1 Buffer Zones
Suitable buffer distances should separate a sewage treatment plant from its
surrounding areas. Buffer Guidelines for the Siting and Zoning of
Industries as recommended by the Department of Environment (DOE)
should be referred to during the planning of suitable location for treatment
plants. The buffer distances recommended in the guidelines depend on the
category of industry being considered.

The provision of buffer zones is essentially an environmental requirement

controlled by the relevant planning authority. The agreement of the Local
Planning Department on buffer zone and plant siting should be sought at
an early stage in the Town and Country planning procedures.
The buffer zone requirements for treatment plants to be observed under

this Guideline are as follows. Refer to Figures 4.3 and 4.4 in this section
for further clarification.
a) Minimum distance of 30 m from the fence of the treatment plant to

the nearest habitable building property line within residential and
commercial development.
b) Minimum distance of 20 m from the fence of the treatment plant to
the nearest property line within industrial development.
c) Minimum distance of 10 m from the fence of the treatment plant to
the nearest habitable building property line if the proposed
treatment plant is fully enclosed. A fully enclosed plant is defined
in section 7.3.1.
d) A minimum distance of 10 m from the fence of the treatment plant
to the nearest habitable building property line if the proposed
treatment plant is covered or buried. However, this reduction in
buffer requirement does not apply if the nearby habitable buildings
are of high rise type. A covered or buried plant is defined in section
7.4.1.
e) Plants with PE less than 150 but are provided with proper odour
and noise mitigation measure may have a 10 m reduced buffer at
the discretion of the Commission.
The buffer zone can be used for any purpose except permanent habitable
buildings. For example, the buffer zone may be used as a drainage reserve,
road or highway reserve, transmission reserve, utility reserve or public
park.
In the case where buffer area is to be regularly used by the residents such
as car park and playgrounds, proper precautions during design stage must
be taken to minimise nuisance such as odour, noise and unpleasant sight to
the surrounding environmental. Adequate and proper screening, odour
containment and treatment facilities must be provided at the sewage
treatment plant to address these issues.

Industry Guidelines
4.2.2 Siting Criteria
The following criteria shall be observed when siting treatment plants.
a) Plants shall be located as far as possible from habitable building to

minimise nuisance to the surrounding.
b) Plants shall be located at the lowest point of a sewerage catchment
basin so that sewage can gravitate into the plant.
c) Plants shall be located near to a suitable watercourse that is able to
receive and assimilate treated effluent from the plant without
reducing beneficial uses of the water course downstream.
d) Plants shall be located on an area that is relatively flat or with
relatively mild slope across the site that would be useful in
promoting efficient hydraulics.
e) The shape of the land area selected shall be such as to minimise the
extent of unusable area within the lot.
f) Plants shall not be located in an area that will result in long term
operational problems or rapid deterioration of the assets.
g) Plants shall have proper access road leading to it.
h) Plants shall be sited away from the followings :
i) Existing cemeteries and gazetted reserves for cemetery.
ii) Religious centres.
iii) Eating places
i) Plants shall be located such that sewers are easily connected
/conveyed to the proposed site.
j) If temporary treatment plants are to be provided, they shall be
located as near as possible to public trunk sewers.
k) For safety reasons, plants shall be located away from children
playgrounds.
Emergency by-pass shall be provided either at the last manhole or wet-

well. The by-pass shall discharge to the nearest drain which shall have
sufficient capacity to cater for the discharge during rainfall.
4.2.3 Environmental Impact Assessment
An environmental appraisal or environmental impact assessment (EIA)

study shall follow Environmental Quality (Prescribed Activities)
(Environmental Impact Assessment) Order, 1987 under Section 34A of the
Environmental Quality Act, 1974 (the EIA Order, 1987 and the EQA, 1974
respectively). The type and scope of the study will depend on the
classification of the plant and the environmental sensitivity of the locality

being considered. EIA shall be conducted in compliance with Volume 2 of

the MSIG.
4.2.4 Hazard and Operability Studies
Hazards and Operability (HAZOP) study shall be conducted in compliance

with Volume 2 of the MSIG. The type and scope of the study will depend
on the classification of the plant.
4.3 Treatment Plant Sizing
4.3.1 Modular Units
Stage development of a STP is governed to a large extend by the

timeframe of the overall development plan of the catchments and the size,
shape and soil condition of the land reserved for the STP. Modular units
will be constructed to cater for the stage development. In determining the
appropriate number of modules and corresponding timing for a staged
development, it is crucial for the designer to estimate the flow capacity
build-up over the entire development phases. The modules must have
sufficient capacity to treat the sewage to meet the efficient discharge
standard, without compromising the economical viability of operation and
maintenance. Too many modules and unit processes will definitely
increase equipment maintenance. On the other hand, inadequate modules
will result in an inefficient treatment performance due to insufficient
capacity and flexibility during the early stage.
Table 4.1 Modulation Requirements
STP Classifications No. of Modules No. of Trains

Class 1 (<1,000PE) 1 N/a
Class 2 (1,001PE – 5000PE) 1 Max 2
Class 3 (5,001PE – Min 2, Max 3 Max 2 for each
20,000PE) Module
Class 4 (>20,000PE) Min 4, Max 10 Max 2 for each
Module
Table 4.1 indicates the modulation requirements in accordance to sewage

treatment plant classes to attain an efficient modulation of sewage
treatment plant development. Each module shall be of equal size and of
similar treatment process. If the proposed process is different from the
original system, special approval is required from the Commission. Certain
unit processes are subject to the modulation requirements in Table 4.1
while other unit processes are designed for the ultimate phase during the

Industry Guidelines
first stage of the development. An example of this is the headworks of a

STP designed for the ultimate phase while the secondary processes are
added progressively as the future phases come on-line.
Modular treatment plants that are designed with two (2) or more parallel
streams must be provided with pipeworks and valves to isolate each stream
of unit process during maintenance and major shut down without
interfering normal operation of the remaining stream.
4.3.2 Standby Units
To avoid significant down time in sewage treatment and overloading of the

process units, standby units shall be provided for the following processes:
a) Inlet Works/Pumps
b) Screen Facilities
c) Grit Chambers
d) Biological Treatment
e) Secondary Clarifiers
f) Sludge Facilities
The common standby mechanical equipments are as follows:-
a) Pumps (raw sewage, effluent, sludge, etc)

b) Mechanical screens
c) Blowers
d) Any other mechanical equipment
Detailed requirements of standby units shall follow the requirements in

Section 5.
4.3.3 Back-up Capacity
The back-up capacity provided shall be such that when one unit process is
taken out of operation, the remaining units shall not be overloaded beyond
50% of their rated capacities.
4.3.4 Design Flow
It is recommended that unit processes that are designed on average flow

basis are sized to allow for infiltration in accordance with MS 1228.
Conveyance networks shall be sized to cater for peak flows, except for

those networks located downstream of an equalisation tank. All unit

processes shall be designed based on the maximum ultimate design flow.
4.4 Land Area Requirements
The recommended land area requirements for various sewage treatment

plants capacities are derived from relevant treatment process concepts and
also taken into consideration other design criteria.
The land area requirements and buffer allowance for temporary sewage
treatment plants may be reduced at the discretion of the Commission on a
case by case basis.
4.4.1 Class 1 and 2 Plants
The recommended land area requirements for Class 1 and 2 plants (up to
5,000 PE) are given in Table 4.2 and Table 4.3 respectively. The net area
does not include the 30 m buffer zone surrounding the plant, but does
include appropriate set backs and access paths within the plant. The area
requirements given are sufficient to achieve an effluent conforming to
Standard A discharge requirements. It is important that allowance is made
for sufficient buffers in planning approvals, to avoid future complaints in
relation to the siting of the plant.
4.4.2 Mechanised Class 3 to 4 Plants
For Class 3 and 4 plants with mechanised systems, the recommended land
area requirements are given in Table 4.4 and 4.5. These systems are to be
used in normal developed and urbanised areas. The net area does not
include the 30 m buffer zone surrounding the plant, but does include
appropriate set backs and access paths within the plant. The area
requirements given are sufficient to achieve an effluent conforming to
Standard A discharge requirements. It is important that allowance is made
for sufficient buffers in planning approvals, to avoid future complaints in
relation to the siting of the plant.
4.4.3 Aerated Lagoons and Stabilisation Ponds
For aerated lagoon and stabilisation pond treatment systems, the

recommended land area is as shown in Table 4.6. Sufficient buffer areas
shall be allowed for surrounding the plant as per paragraph 4.2.1.
4.4.4 Imperfect Sites
The recommended land area requirements represent an ideal case, where it

is possible to locate the STP within a rectangular land area that is relatively
flat. In practice, the allocated land may be irregular in shape, sited in low

Industry Guidelines
lying or undulating to steep valley terrain. For such cases, suitable

adjustments to the land area requirement have to be made.
Thus, the shape and elevations of the land allocated for the STP
development must be determined during planning stage so that the
configuration of the STP can be planned properly in order to allocate
adequate land for the purpose. This also enables estimates for additional
land required. It may also be required to cut or fill operations to level the
land.
4.4.5 Reduced Land Areas for STPs
The area requirements, as stipulated in Table 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5 and 4.6, must
be adhered to as strictly as possible. The required areas in these tables
include appropriate setbacks and access paths within the plant. However the
areas have not include any buffer zone surrounding each plant as indicated
in Section 4.2.1.
In developments where land is really a constraint the Commission may

consider for a reduced land area requirement. The project proponent will
have to demonstrate clearly the need for a reduced land area before an
approval can be granted. For this case, detailed design calculations of all
unit processes, together with the proposed layout, shall be submitted at the
planning stage for consideration of approval by the Commission. Otherwise,
the land area required under these guidelines must be followed.

Table 4.2 Land Area Requirements for Class 1
Population Land Area

Equivalent Requirement *
(m2) (acre)
100 210 0.052
150 285 0.070
200 360 0.089
250 430 0.106
300 485 0.120
350 545 0.135
400 600 0.148
450 655 0.162
500 700 0.173
550 745 0.184
600 790 0.195
650 835 0.206
700 870 0.215
750 905 0.224
800 940 0.232
850 980 0.242
900 1,010 0.250
950 1,040 0.257
1,000 1,070 0.264
Note: * The required area only includes appropriate setbacks and access paths within the
plant but not the buffer zone surrounding each plant as indicated in Section 4.2.1.

Industry Guidelines
Table 4.3 Land Area Requirement for Class 2

(m2) (acre)
1,100 1,115 0.276
1,200 1,160 0.287
1,300 1,200 0.297
1,400 1,240 0.306
1,500 1,275 0.315
1,600 1,310 0.324
1,700 1,340 0.331
1,800 1,370 0.339
1,900 1,395 0.345
2,000 1,420 0.351
3,000 2,226 0.55
4,000 2,671 0.66
5,000 3,076 0.76
Table 4.4 Land Area Requirements for

Mechanised Class 3 Plants

(ha) (acre)
5,001 0.31 0.76
6,000 0.40 0.99
7,000 0.49 1.21
8,000 0.59 1.46
9,000 0.69 1.71
10,000 0.78 1.93
15,000 1.00 2.47
20,000 1.19 2.95

Table 4.5 Land Area Requirements for

Mechanised Class 4 Plants
Population Land Area Requirement *
Equivalent
(ha) (acre)
20,001 1.19 2.95
25,000 1.37 3.38
30,000 1.53 3.79
35,000 1.81 4.48
40,000 1.97 4.88
45,000 2.12 5.25
50,000 2.23 5.52
55,000 2.37 5.84
60,000 2.52 6.22
65,000 2.67 6.61
70,000 2.93 7.23
75,000 3.27 8.07
80,000 3.49 8.61
85,000 3.69 9.12
90,000 3.89 9.61
95,000 4.07 10.06
100,000 4.25 10.49
110,000 4.57 11.29
120,000 4.87 12.02
130,000 5.14 12.70
140,000 5.39 13.32
150,000 5.63 13.90
160,000 5.84 14.44
170,000 6.05 14.95
180,000 6.25 15.43
190,000 6.43 15.89
200,000 6.60 16.32
250,000 7.36 18.20
300,000 7.98 19.73
450,000 9.36 23.14

Industry Guidelines
Table 4.6 - Required Land Area for

Stabilisation Pond and Aerated Lagoons
Population Standard A* Standard B*

Equivalent
(ha) (acre) (ha) (acre)
2,000 0.48 1.18 0.45 1.10
3,000 0.69 1.69 0.59 1.45
4,000 0.89 2.20 0.71 1.75
5,000 1.09 2.68 0.82 2.04
10,000 2.03 5.01 1.31 3.24
15,000 2.92 7.2 1.72 4.25
20,000 3.78 9.3 2.09 5.16
25,000 4.62 11.4 2.42 5.99
30,000 5.45 13.5 2.74 6.77
35,000 6.26 15.5 3.04 7.50
40,000 7.05 17.4 3.32 8.2
45,000 7.85 19.4 3.59 8.9
50,000 8.63 21.3 3.86 9.5
55,000 9.40 23.2 4.11 10.2
60,000 10.16 25.1 4.36 10.8
65,000 10.92 27.0 4.60 11.4
70,000 11.68 28.9 4.83 11.9
75,000 12.42 30.7 5.06 12.5
80,000 13.17 32.5 5.28 13.1
85,000 13.91 34.4 5.50 13.6
90,000 14.64 36.2 5.72 14.1
95,000 15.37 30.0 5.93 14.6
100,000 16.10 39.8 6.13 15.2
110,000 17.54 43.3 6.54 16.2
120,000 18.97 46.9 6.93 17.1
130,000 20.38 50.4 7.31 18.1

Table 4.6 - Required Land Area for Stabilisation

Pond and Aerated Lagoons (Cont.)
Population Standard A* Standard B*

Equivalent
(ha) (acre) (ha) (acre)
140,000 21.79 53.8 7.69 19.0
150,000 23.18 57.3 8.05 19.9
160,000 24.57 60.7 8.40 20.8
170,000 25.95 64.1 8.75 21.6
180,000 27.32 67.5 9.09 22.5
190,000 28.68 70.9 9.43 23.3
200,000 30.04 74.2 9.76 24.1
Note: * The required area only includes appropriate setbacks and access paths within
the plant but not the buffer zone surrounding each plant as indicated in Section 4.2.1.

Industry Guidelines
Figure 4.1 – STP Land Area Requirements for Planning Layout

Approval for New Development
Start
Determine catchment
served
Determine ultimate PE
Identified effluent
Requirement
Apply sitting criteria
Is development Is development
Y N
>2,000 PE? in urban area?
N Y
Use land area from Use land area from Use land area from
Table 4.2 Table 4.3,4 and 5 Table 4.6
( Class 1 plants) ( Class 2 to 4 plants) ( pond systems)
End

Figure 4.2 – STP Land Area Requirements for Structure Plans
Start
Local Plan
Formulation
Perform the next two

steps concurrently
Determine natural Determine suitable

drainage catchments receiving waters
Calculate ultimate Identify effluent

catchment PE standards
Look up land area

requirements in
Tables 4.2, 4.3, 4.4 or 4.5
Table 4.3, 4 and 5:

Table 4.2: Table 4.5: For remote
Greater than1,000 PE area siting of STP
Up to 1,000 PE
for urban areas
Apply siting criteria
Select and zone

suitable site
Consider multi-use of
buffer areas
Reserve land for STP
End

Industry Guidelines
Figure 4.3 Guidelines For Buffer Zone
Plants Situated In Residential / Commercial Areas

Treatment Plant Site Buffer Zone 30m Min. Residential /
Commercial Plot
5m Min.
Access And
Screening
STW Fence Property

Open Treatment Boundary
Plant
Beautification
Zone Buffer Zone 10m Min.

Treatment Plant Site Residential /
Commercial Plot
5m Min.
Access and
Screening
Property
Enclosed Plant STW Fence Boundary
Treatment Plant Site Buffer Zone 10m Min. Residential / Commercial Plot
5m Min.
Access And
Screening
STW Fence Property

Buried / Covered Boundry
Plant
Treatment Plant Site Buffer Zone 30m Min. Residential / High Rise
5m Min.
Access and
Screening
Property
Enclosed Plant STW Fence Boundary
Plants Situated In Industrial Areas

Treatment Plant Site Buffer Zone 20m Min. Industrial Plot
5m Min.
Access And
Screening
STW Fence Factory Fence

Open Treatment
Plant
Note : The buffer area can be used for roads, drains, utility reserve, agricultural or other similar
purposes.

44
30 m 30 m
STP LAND AREA
20 m REQUIREMENT 20 m
10 m 10 m
Volume 4
30m Surround For Residential and Commercial Note: Buffer areas can be used for roads, drains, utility reserve, public
Development parks, agricultural or similiar purposes other than permanent
Figure 4.4 Plan View of Buffer Zone Requirements
20m Surround For Industrial Development habitable buildings.

10m Surround For Fully - Enclosed Plants
The land shall be relatively flat and of a regular shape. Any unusable
area within the plot shall be minimised.
Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Sewerage
4.5 Mechanical and Electrical Requirements
Some general guidelines on the design and installation of mechanical and

electrical equipment are outlined below.
4.5.1 Mechanical Installation
(I) Design Considerations
The designer shall consider incorporating the following criteria:
a) The design shall simplify the equipment required, control system,

maintenance and operational procedures, while fulfilling the
intended performance and standard of service.
b) The brand and models of major drive equipment (e.g.: pumps,
blowers, aerators, clarifier scrappers, etc.) shall be those approved
by the Commission.
c) The types and makes of equipment provided throughout the facility
shall be standardised, whenever possible.
d) Only new and genuine equipment shall be provided.
e) Equipment sizing and selection shall minimise energy and other
consumables costs.
f) The minimum economic life of equipment.
g) Material selection shall be in accordance with the Commission
specifications or/and other relevant international standards
h) Components shall be robust and suitable for use. Where thin metal
sheeting is used, it shall be stiffened to minimise distortion.
i) Water storage tanks shall not be placed on the roof top of any
control room; all water supply system shall be homed with separate
entrance.
(II) Installation
a) The base frame of rotational equipment or any equipment that may

induce vibration shall be provided with anti-vibration mount.
b) All moving parts shall be designed and installed in a manner that is
inherently safe to operate.
c) Foundations shall be adequately designed to include all dynamic
load and anchored to withstand all loads imposed by the
equipment. Reinforced concrete foundations are preferred.
d) Equipment shall be accurately located, levelled and secured by
holding down bolts. Non-shrink grout shall then be used to

complete the foundation. In some cases, a resilient connection to

the foundation is required, in which case, the manufacturers
instructions shall be followed.
e) Holding down bolts shall be of stainless steel and shall be of a
minimum grade 316 if in contact with sewage.
f) Puddle collar is required for all pipe passing through all walls
g) Appropriate joints shall be provided in all pipeworks to facilitate
the removal of equipment, meters, valves and other special items
without dismantling the entire pipeline.
h) Valves shall be provided for isolation purpose.
i) Outdoor and dry installation pump shall be provided with housing.
j) The designer must ensure that the unit processes are arranged in
such a way to prevent / reduce criss-crossing of piping works,
unnecessary bends, choking of interconnected pipe and excessive
hydraulic losses through the system.
k) The platform level of mechanical equipment and controllers of any
process unit shall be located above design flood level
4.5.2 Vibration
All revolving parts shall be properly balanced both statically and

dynamically so that in running up to, at full normal operating speeds, and
at any loads up to the maximum there shall be no undue vibration
anywhere in the machine or transmitted to the adjacent structure. The
criteria adopted for vibration severity shall be the RMS value of the
vibration velocity in millimeters per second.
The bare frame of rotational equipment or any equipment that may induce
vibration shall be provided with anti-vibration mount. Where rotational
equipment or equipment which may induce vibration is connected to
piping, then vibration isolator shall be provided.
4.5.3 Noise
Noise levels from machinery shall comply with the Factories and
Machinery (Noise Exposure) Regulations 1989 and Occupational Health
and Safety Act. Noise control measures and appropriate safety protection
for operators must be provided where necessary.
Noise control measures shall be implemented to control the generated

noise level to below 65 dB at a distance of 2 m from the boundary of the
housed noise source at all times. Additionally, the general noise levels
generated shall be measured 10 m from any point of the plant site within
the nearest public space and/or occupied space to an acceptable level

Industry Guidelines
stipulated by the appropriate regulators. Silencers and acoustic enclosures

shall be provided as required to achieve the above noise level reduction.
Enclosures used to achieve these noise reductions shall permit ready

access to equipment for routine maintenance. Adequate air ventilation
shall be provided to allow cooling of the enclosure to prevent overheating
of the equipment/motors.
Noise level measurement shall be made with a sound level meter which
complies with BS EN 60651 and which is fitted with an ‘A’ weighting
network. The sound pressure level shall be measured in dB (A).
Noise level for all electronically operated electrical device such as soft
starters, variable speed drives and others shall be conform to IEC, EN.
Thus it shall fulfil all EMC Immunity requirements complying with
EN500082-1, EN50082-2, EN50082-3.
4.5.4 Safety around Equipment
All designs and equipment shall be made and installed with safety in mind.
Nothing in this Design Guidelines shall remove the designer’s obligation
to incorporate equipment or designs that would increase the safety of the
plant.
The installation layout and equipment design shall not allow any item of
equipment to be so positioned that danger could arise to operating
personnel and equipment during normal operation and maintenance.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of switch board, control
panel, cables, switch gears, lighting, small power, rotational equipment,
other electrical equipment and accessories.
All facilities shall be designed to comply with the Occupational Safety and
Health Act 514, 1994; properly designed treatment plants will enable the
operator to safely handle the treatment plant throughout its design life. The
plant shall also be designed to comply with other related Acts such as IEE,
Akta Bekalan Elektrik 1990 (Akta 448) and Peraturan –Peraturan Elektrik
1994.
Safety level for all electronically operated electrical device such as soft
starters, variable speed drive and others shall conform to IEC, EN, UL,
NFC and VDE. Thus it shall fulfill EN 50178, EN 60204- 1, EN 60950
(2000, 3rd edition), IEC 61800-5.
Where appropriate, IEE and Akta 448 (1990) and Peraturan Elektrik 1994
must be complied with in all electrical installation.

The following shall be provided:
a) All moving parts shall be protected by suitable guards. Where

inspection is required, an open mesh with frame and suitably
supported may be used. The maximum aperture of the mesh shall be
6 mm.
b) All guards shall be readily removable and replaceable to they
correct orientation only. However the guard shall be designed with
features to prevent accidental dislocation from its’ original
position. The fasteners when dropped during dismantling, must be
easily retrievable and should not damage any equipment or
endanger personnel, else fixed fasteners shall be used.
c) An emergency stop button, preferably of mushroom head type shall
be located adjacent to all equipment. More than one emergency
stop button shall be used, if access around the item is restricted.
d) Long items, such as conveyor belts, shall have an emergency
lanyard applied to each accessible length of conveyor.
e) Surfaces which are greater than 50°C shall be guarded.
f) Permanent warning signs shall be posted at visible location at all
dangerous areas and shall clearly indicate the nature of risk at that
area. This includes warning signage at digesters area, high tension
room, low voltage room generator room and other hazardous areas.
g) Clear working space as recommended in Figure 4.5 shall be
provided.
h) Automatic CO2 discharge triggered by heat and smoke sensors
shall be installed in high voltage switch room, transformer room,
low voltage switch room and generator room.
i) High tension room shall have signage to clearly indicate the
purpose of the room and also safety signage to prevent
unauthorised entry.

Industry Guidelines
Figure 4.5 - Clear Working Space
Wall 1 m or 1.5 W or
whichever greater
Equipment
Wall
1 m or 1.5 W or
whichever greater
W Equipment
1 m or 1.5 W
L or whichever
greater
4.5.5 Motors, Controllers and Motor Starters
(I) Motors
a) Provide readily replaceable anti-condensation heaters for motors

that do not require frequent operation.
b) At least three thermistors to be provided for motors which are
>50 kW.
c) Electrical motors should be rated as continuous run.
d) Motors > 22kW shall be protected with soft starter or variable
speed drive.
e) Where water hammer prevails, frequency inverter shall be
provided.
f) The appropriate cooling system based on the requirements of the
equipment shall be provided.
(II) Controllers
a) Start push buttons to be green and recessed

b) Stop push buttons to be red and recessed
c) Emergency Stop push button to be red and mushroom head type

d) ON signal lamps to be green

e) OFF signal lamps to be red
f) Trip signal lamps to be amber
(III) Motor Starters
a) Up to 3.7 kW – Direct-On-Line starters

b) Above 3.7 and up to 7.5 kW – Star/Delta starters
c) Above 7.5 and up to 22 kW – Auto-transformer starters
d) More than 22 kW – Soft starter
e) Above 50 kW – Variable speed drive is preferred
Soft starting of motors above 30kW or greater in size is necessary to

minimise power disturbances (e.g. power surge) and process disturbances
(e.g. water hammer). Variable speed drive shall be considered at
application where variable capacity may be need to enhance the process
flexibility, for example, aeration device and blowers.
4.5.6 Power Supply Systems
Power supply to sewage treatment plants shall be as follows:
Sewage Treatment
Category Supply Requirements
Plant
A Single incomer with properly All Class 1, 2 and 3
design control overflow system STPs
during power failure (all electrical
control system shall be located
above design flood level)
B B1) Single incomer with diesel STP Class 4
generators for back-up supply.
B2) Single incomer with control
overflow system and genset
contribution fee.
a) Where a SCADA system is provided and essential parameters are

to be monitored during power supply interruptions, a DC supply or
a UPS (uninterrupted power supply) must be provided.
b) Batteries/UPS shall have the capacity to operate the SCADA
system for a minimum 6 hrs during power failure to safe last event,

Industry Guidelines
to monitor the essential parameters and to enable early warning

system.
c) No direct tapping of power is allowed from distribution board
(DB). Proper protection shall be provided for any direct connection
from switchboard. Earh leakage current breaker (ELCB) shall be
provided for DB.
d) The power system distribution shall be designed to achieve a
minimum power factor of 0.9. For phase development, the plant
and power system distribution shall be designed for maximum load
and installed in appropriate modular unit to ensure that the
minimum power factor is achievable at all phases of operation.
e) Equipment shall be protected by either moulded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) or miniature circuit breaker (MCB) based on its
suitability. Electrical design calculations shall be provided to
justify each selection.
f) Every control circuit shall be protected with separate MCB.
g) TNB meter panels shall be installed close to the site entrance or
adjacent to but physically separated from the main swithcboard.
Suitable flexible steel conduit with approved adaptors shall be
supplied and fitted between the main switchboard.
h) All metering panel shall be located flush with the fence and door
opening from outside to enable TNB inspector to read the kWh and
kVAhr reading.
i) Provide earthing connected with Current Transformer (CT) for
Large Power Consumer (LPC) (i.e. consumption with more than
100A or 10kW).
j) To provide earthing connected to ELCB/ RCCB /ELR or Over
Current & Earth Fault relay to protect overcurrent and surge
current to all wiring connected to TNB metering panel for Large
Power Customer (LPC) or Ordinary Power Customer (OPC). Test
for earthing system shall be below or equal 1 Ohm.
4.5.7 Back-up Generator
a) If diesel generators are to be provided they shall be used for

essential loads only (these include influent pumping in pumping
station, feeding pumps in balancing tank, decanter for SBR;
minimum 30% aeration requirement; emergency services system,
essential lighting and ventilation system.
b) Where generators are installed, they must be accompanied with the
necessary supporting systems, including automatic cut-in in the
event of mains failure, fuel storage and transfer; and if installed

indoors, including ventilation, fire detection/protection, and

working alarms.
c) In the event of power interruption/failure; when diesel generators
are used, the SCADA shall be powered by UPS or DC battery.
d) For plants ≥ 100,000 PE, the capacity of the back-up generator may
vary provided detail calculation must be provided to justify that
sewage can be kept in aerobic condition for a maximum duration of
6 hours
e) Gen-set shall be sized to the incoming TNB voltage requirement.
4.5.8 Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies
a) For simplicity, separate the Supply Authority Metering from the

main switchboard
b) Electro galvanised plates to be used to protect materials against
corrosion due to high humidity
c) Panel isolators and door locks to be capable of padlocking open
with 6 mmc - hasp padlock
d) Use separate panel boards for general purpose light and power
e) Group all motor starting equipment for an area into multi-motor,
starter control board
f) Cabinets are to be constructed to prevent the ingress of insects and
vermin
g) For incomer above 400A, provide over current and earth fault
protection on all starter circuits in excess of 200 A
h) Where a circuit has a main and standby supply, provide an isolator
in each supply circuit
i) Junction boxes for submersible pumps and float controls shall be
above the floor or any possibility of flood level and must not be
located in the wet well.
4.5.9 Control Cabinets
(I) General
a) Provide 900 mm minimum clearance between an open door and

any fixed object.
b) Provide 900 mm clearance between open cabinet doors of facing
cabinets.

Industry Guidelines
c) Front access cubicles to have the electrical clearance distances

between door mounted equipment and gear tray mounted
equipment as specified in the regulations.
d) Mount all equipment inside cabinets on gear trays.
e) All cabinets to have a base frame, at least 50 mm high.
f) All control panels shall be provided with phase sequence relay.
g) All control rooms shall be isolated from invasive environment of
the sewerage system, where carbonisation, corrosion or
condensation may occurs that lead to short-circuiting.
h) Height to be no greater than 1,600 mm internally.
i) Mount cabinet on reinforced concrete plinth, 200 mm minimum
above ground.
j) Provide a reinforced concrete paved area for the full width of the
cabinet and extending 1 m in front of the cabinet doors, when they
are opened.
k) Cable entry from the top only.
l) Provide forced ventilation fan for cubicles housing PLC equipment.
m) Provide ventilation for variable speed drives and soft starters.
n) Natural ventilation is suitable for direct-on-line, star-delta, and auto
transformer starters.
o) The minimum acceptable IP rating and tests required shall be
clearly specified.
(II) Outdoor Cabinets
a) Self contained, free-standing, weatherproof cabinets to be

constructed of marine grade aluminium, stainless steel grade 316 or
glass reinforced plastic.
b) Mount control indication and alarm facilities on internal doors
enclosing compartments housing electrical plant and equipment.
c) Provide external doors with security locking facilities.
d) Provide double roofs on cabinets to reduce solar effects.
e) Wall mounted outdoor weather proof control panel shall come with
an awning extended by at least 2m from the wall.
f) Floor mounted outdoor weather proof control panel shall come
with a roof extended 2m from the panel.
g) External weather proof control panel of equal and more than 100A
shall be provided with permanent CO2 fire extinguisher.

4.5.10 Control Requirements
This section outlines the general philosophy on control requirements for

the whole facilities.
EWS + PC
NO. TYPE OF PLANT (monitoring) / SCADA
Data Logger
Network Pumping Station
1. < 100,000 PE ≥ 100,000 PE
(NPS)
2a. Sewage Treatment Plant Class 3 STPs Class 4 STPs
Sewage Treatment Plant

2b. requires full automation, e.g. Class 1, 2 and 3 Class 4 STPs
sequencing batch reactor.
Sewage Treatment Plant
2c. Class 1, 2 and 3 Class 4 STPs
(Standard A)
Notes : EWS – Early Warning System

SCADA – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(I) General Considerations
a) PLC shall restart automatically once the power supply reinstate

after a power supply interruption.
b) PLC shall be equipped with manual over-ride features.
c) Continuously running drives shall restart automatically after a
power supply interruption.
d) Plant to have time delayed restarting sequences for equipment to
avoid overloading power supply.
e) Transducers shall be used to sense the signal for related warning
alarms.
f) Trip and shutdown to be measured by separate relays.
g) The operating status and condition of the process shall be verified
by measuring appropriate performance indicator and not by
inference.
h) SCADA room shall be air-conditioned.
i) Telephone line must be laid during construction for all sewerage
works to be equipped with SCADA.

Industry Guidelines
(II) Manual Control
a) Interlocks shall be provided to prevent damage to the equipment

during equipment start up, for example, bearing overload,
overheated, temperature, loss of cooling water, no flow when
operating.
b) Selector switches to be provided at one location so that an
equipment can be manually operated from that location.
(III) Drive Systems
a) Each drive must be independently provided with the following

features :
i. ON - starts and runs the drive
ii. OFF - stops the drive
iii. AUTO - operates the drive in accordance with automatic
control system
b) Indicate operation by an ammeter
c) Record running hours with a local indicator and by computation in
a central SCADA system where applicable.
d) Local annunciation on motor starter of each fault condition.
e) Record kilo-Watt.hour (kWh) of major drive equipment.
(IV) Automatic System Control Facilities
a) Displays operator adjustable parameters, examples set point of top

water level in a tank and the target dissolved oxygen level for a
process.
b) Ability for the authorised operator to adjust the set point of
operator adjustable parameters. A “default” value should always
be provided.
c) Displays to advise operator of the set points of non-operator
adjustable parameters. Examples would include the overflow level
on a tank and the trip temperature for a bearing.
d) Displays measured values by all instruments, used to measure flow,
level, DO, pH, temperature or applicable parameters.
e) The process control sequences must ensure system problems such
as water hammer overtorque or overpressure the equipment of air
compressors. Time delayed in starting and stopping of equipment
where multiple duty units are installed, use a value with slower rate
the final stage of closing, vary the speed of equipment during
starting and stopping are some of the option for consideration in
careful process automation.

4.5.11 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA)
SCADA is the acronym for Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. The
term refers to a large-scale, distributed measurement (and control) system.
SCADA systems are used to monitor or/and to control chemical, physical
or transport processes. The following briefly describe the requirements of
SCADA while the detail requirements of SCADA are listed in Appendix
C.
The term SCADA usually refers to a central system that monitors and
controls a complete site. The bulk of the site control is actually performed
automatically by a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Host control
functions are almost always restricted to basic site over-ride or supervisory
level capability. Provision of SCADA system shall be in accordance with
Section 4.5.10.
(I) Control Systems
a) All equipment shall be tagged in the SCADA system.

b) Develop sequential function diagrams to specify the control logic
to suit the process operation for each system.
c) Check the process operation against the resulting sequential
function diagram.
d) PLC programs to be written in modular form to aid fault finding
and commissioning.
e) Design programs to be ‘fail to safety’. That is, PLC failure will
cause plant to stop.
f) On restoration of supply, all controlled system shall be returned to
the ready position before automatic restart takes place.
g) Bench test all application programs for PLC, before program
installation on site.
h) Conduct functional control circuits tests for all items of equipment.
i) Ensure PLC programming software licences are delivered.
j) Provide paper copy listing of all PLC application programs and soft
copies of application program (two copies of each required).
k) Despite the PE, all plants which requires automation and control
shall be provided with human machine interface (HMI) at site.
(II) Supervisory Systems
a) Where supervisory systems are used, schedule all graphic displays

required to control plant using columns to define:
− Graphic Name

Industry Guidelines
− Information displayed
− Control features
b) Update times for screens to be not more than one second.
c) Nominate the alarm title to be used/displayed for each process-
generated fault input or fault generated internally by the PLC
program.
d) Nominate critical and non-critical alarms and the method of
differentiation. Examples would be: nominating an alarm on a
limit which has been reached as critical and an alarm on a limit
which is being approached as non-critical; differentiated by, for
example, red/amber lights or horn/bell).
e) At least eight variables to be displayed on a trend graph
simultaneously for ease of monitoring and comparison. This is a
measure of the level of software sophistication which should be
expected.
f) Supervisory system to log running hours for all plant items.
g) Nominate the reports to be generated for plant operation,
management and history. For example, reports to be daily, weekly
and monthly and the list of parameters to be reported on in each.
h) Alarm analysis, that is, frequency of occurrence, similar plant
faults, etc, to be provided as part of the supervising programs.
4.5.12 Early Warning System (EWS)
The EWS is used to monitor the status of the equipment operating inside
the treatment plants such as pumps and aeration equipment. It shall act as
the means to communicate information via Short Messaging Service
(SMS), e-mail or via other telecommunication mean to technical staff for
the fast recovery of the treatment system.
EWS system shall be able to transmit digital and analog values from the
remote module to the operator through their inputs (equipment) via SMS
and e-mail messages in text mode. The modules shall be able to interpret
SMS message from the operator to activate or deactivate long distance
machine (remote control).
4.5.13 Instrumentation
Provision for instrumentation shall be in accordance with the following

Table 4.7. Instruments shall be installed in such a way that they can be
removed for maintenance without interrupting the process.

Table 4.7: Required Process Instrumentation
Treatment Unit Instrumentation STP Class

Inlet Pump Station Level/ Pressure All
Flow Measurement All
Gas Detector (H2S, CO2, O2 & 4
Combustible gases)
Aeration DO/pH/ Turbidity 4
Temperature 4
Blower Air flow/ pressure/ All
temperature/rpm
Decanter Position Indicator /Speed All
Effluent Flow Measurement All
Sludge (WAS/RAS) Flow Measurement 4
Electrical Drive Am/Volt/HR/kW/Power All
Factor meter
Disinfection Dosage/Transmittance All
/Flowrate/outlet water level
indicator
Polymer Dosage/ Level Indicator/ All
Flowrate
Sludge Feed Flowrate/ Pressure All
4.5.14 Cables and Cabling Installation
(I) General
a) Segregate cables into the following categories:

− power (less than 1,000 V phase to phase)
− instrumentation/telemetry
− control
b) Wherever possible, use a separate cable-support system for each
cable category.
c) Separate such cable support systems by minimum clear distances of
300 mm.
d) When one cable support system has to be used, separate cable
categories by minimum clear distances of 150 mm.
e) Secure cable at 900 mm intervals for horizontal runs and 300 mm
for vertical runs.
f) Cable ties shall be made of non-corrosive material and if exposed
to the environment, shall have UV protection.

Industry Guidelines
g) All cables shall be at least of double PVC protection, and if

exposed to the environment then armoured cable shall be provided.
(II) Instrumentation
a) Use separate cables for digital and analog signals.

b) Marshal cables in a process or geographical area into junction
boxes.
c) Use multipair cables between areas.
(III) Buried Cables
a) Install cables without trees or through joints, unless approved.

b) All buried cables shall be laid in ducts.
(IV) Underground Ducts
a) Construct road crossings from uPVC conduit of minimum 100 mm

diameter with 900 mm cover and encased on all sides with 150 mm
concrete.
b) All other ducts to be PVC conduit laid with a minimum cover of
600 mm. Ducts to be bedded in 75 mm sieved sand.
c) Provide draw strings in all ducts.
d) Provide cable pits to suit cabling layout and to allow drain-in of
cables through the duct work. Cable pits shall be provided no
greater than 100 m apart. They shall be fitted with trafficable cast
iron covers and equipped with drainage.
e) Seal ducts into buildings with approved systems providing a fire
rating of 30 minutes.
(V) Conduits
a) All cabling within buildings or structures where cable trays are not
permitted, and in all external locations, shall be installed within
conduits.
b) Conduits installed externally shall be arranged to minimise their
length and exposure. PVC heavy duty conduit is permissible, where
it is protected from physical damage and UV. Otherwise, metal or
flexible conduits shall be used.
c) Use flexible steel reinforced conduit for connections, where
relative movement and removal for maintenance has to be
considered.

(VI) Cable Support Systems
a) Ensure cable support systems in electrical switch rooms, equipment

(for example, pump) rooms and service galleries.
b) When run in common service galleries, ensure cables are not
adjacent to hot services.
4.5.15 Earthing and Lightning Protection
a) Provide earthing and lightning protection to meet local regulations.

b) Use a specialist inspector to verify the installation.
c) Earthing test results shall be submitted and results shall be below or
equal to 1 ohm.
d) Lightning arrestor test results shall be submitted and results shall
not more than 5 ohms.
e) Earthing and lightning arrestor chamber shall be of pre-cast
material.
4.5.16 General Purpose Power
Provide general purpose power socket outlets as follows:
a) Single phase outlet rated at 10A adjacent to, or inside each control
cabinet and within 10 m of all equipment installations.
b) Three phase outlet rated at 50A within 20 m of every screen, sludge
scraper, clarifier rake, grit collector and conveyor.
c) Three (3) phase (with neutral) outlet rated at 50Amp shall be
provided at an interval of at least 20m.
d) These outlets shall be water proofed industrial type switch socket
outlets (SSO).
4.5.17 Manuals, Drawings and Labelling
a) Provide equipment manuals that are specific to the plant and

instrumentation supplied.
b) System manuals describe the way each system manages the
individual items of plant. Ensure these are available in draft form,
before testing and commissioning commences.
c) Provide plant function diagrams, electrical system, electrical
circuit, Process and Instrumentation Diagram(P&ID), instrument
loop diagrams, electrical design calculations and single line

Industry Guidelines
diagrams with endorsement by qualified person, before the plant is

pre-commissioned.
d) All plant and equipment are to be provided with inscriptions and
labels to facilitate understanding and safe operation and to satisfy
the requirements of any standards and regulations applying to the
works. Labelling includes:
i) inscriptions on equipment, cubicles, instruments, process
controllers and on small equipment such as relays, control
switches, indicating lights, etc
ii) identification of cables at both ends and along their lengths
iii) identification of terminations for cable cores and cubicle
wiring in accordance with the circuit diagrams
e) Drawings submitted shall show all unit processes to be constructed,
and equipment to be installed based on the ultimate capacity of the
sewerage system, especially for phase development where the
construction of unit processes and installation of equipment will be
based on phasing.
f) For treatment plant with PLC/SCADA systems, ladder diagram,
programme source codes and programming console unit shall be
provided before pre-commissioning of the treatment plant.
4.5.18 Hazardous Areas
a) A plan setting out various hazardous areas and classes of electrical

hazard is required. For example, flameproof area in the vicinity of
anaerobic digesters/sludge gas compressors, chemical storages or
laboratories.
b) Ensure the plant and methods of construction and installation
conform to the requirements of each defined area, as this plan will
be used by the Supply Authority to inspect the area for
conformance.
4.6 Material Requirements for STP Structures and

Installations
Materials permitted for structural fabrication in treatment plants are

concrete, reinforced concrete, steel, fibreglass reinforced plastic and
aluminium. The requirements for such materials shall be in accordance
with information provided in the following sub-sections. Any others
material used for STP structures and installations shall obtain special
approval from the Commission.

Structural design of treatment plant structures shall be submitted by

registered professional engineers. They shall be in accordance with the
requirements and standards given in this section and any other relevant
standards, as well as, sound engineering practices.
4.6.1 Concrete and Reinforcement
a) Concrete structures shall be designed in accordance with MS 1195,

except that concrete structures for retaining sewage and other
aqueous liquids shall be designed in accordance with BS 8007.
b) Concrete shall generally comply with the relevant requirements in
MS 523.
c) Concrete for structures retaining sewage shall have a strength grade
not less than grade C35A. Strength grades higher than C35A may
be specified as required by the Commission.
d) Concrete for structures retaining sewage shall be designed for
buoyancy due to ground condition.
e) Concrete for purposes other than structures retaining sewage shall
have a strength grade not less than grade C20 where unreinforced,
and not less than grade C30 where reinforced. Strength grades
higher than the minimum may be specified as required by the
Commission.
f) Concrete structures retaining sewage, shall be lined with high
alumina cement mortar of 20 mm minimum thickness or other
approved liners/lining materials.
g) Concrete and cement mortar exposed to soils or groundwater shall
be made using a cement suitably resistant to sulphate attack, as
specified in this Section. Where part of a concrete structure is
exposed to soils or groundwater, cement suitably resistant to
sulphate attack shall be used for the entire structure.
h) Cement to be used to resist sulphate attack shall be one of the
following:
i) sulphate-resisting portland cement complying with MS 1037
ii) portland pulverised fuel ash cement complying with MS 1227
iii) ground granulated blast furnace slag complying with
MS 1387
iv) high silica content portland cement
v) supersuphated cement complying with BS 4248
i) Aggregates shall comply with MS 29 and shall be coarse aggregate
of 20 mm nominal maximum size
j) Approval for admixtures shall be obtained prior to inclusion in the
concrete mix. All admixtures shall comply with MS 822.
k) Steel reinforcement shall comply with:

Industry Guidelines
i) MS 144 for cold reduced mild steel wire.

ii) MS 145 for steel fabric.
iii) MS 146 for hot rolled steel bars.
l) Welding of steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with
BS 7123.
m) Waterstops for sealing joints in concrete shall comply with
MS 1292.
4.6.2 Steel
(I) Structural steel
a) Structural steel sections shall comply with BS 4 or otherwise with:

i) EN 10162 for cold rolled steel sections
ii) EN 10210 for hot rolled steel sections
iii) EN 10025 for weldable structural steel
iv) EN 10296, EN 10297 and EN 10305 for steel tube
b) The use of structural steel in building shall be in accordance with
MS 416.
c) Minor structural steelwork shall be Grade 43A complying with EN
10025. All other steelwork shall be of appropriate grade, as
determined using MS 416 and other appropriate standards. These
shall be determined by a qualified structural engineer.
(II) Coating for steel
a) Steelwork that may be in contact with sewage through immersion,

splash or spray, or that is over tanks containing sewage, shall be
protected against corrosion using one of the following coating
systems:
i) high build tar epoxy system complying with AS 3750.2 and
applied in two or more coats to give a total dry film thickness
of not less than 200 µm
ii) high build micaceous iron oxide pigmented epoxy system
complying with AS 3750.12 and applied in two or more coats
to give a total dry film thickness of not less 200 µm
iii) hot dip galvanised coating of 140 µm nominal thickness in
accordance with MS 740
iv) sealed sprayed zinc coating of 150 µm nominal thickness in
accordance with EN ISO 2063

b) Other coatings providing 10 to 20 years service, before first

maintenance, as selected using Table 3 Part 8 of BS 5493 shall be
considered for approval by the Commission. Steelwork that is
exposed to the external atmosphere, except severe marine
atmospheres, shall be protected against corrosion using one of the
following coating systems:
i) a prime coat of a two pack polyamide cured epoxy zinc
phosphate of dry film thickness 60 to 80 µm with a finishing
coat of a high build micaceous iron oxide chlorinated rubber
paint, spray applied to a dry film thickness of 60 to no more
than 80 µm
ii) hot dip galvanised coating of 85 µm nominal thickness, in
accordance with MS 740
iii) sealed sprayed zinc coating of 150 µm nominal thickness, in
accordance with EN ISO 2063
c) Steel substrates shall be prepared before application of coatings, in
accordance with BS 7079.
d) Other corrosion protection coating systems for steelwork shall be
determined using BS 5493 or AS 2312 for tropical atmospheres so
as to provide 20 or more years to first maintenance.
e) Unprotected steelwork in contact with sewage shall be stainless
steel grade 316S31 complying with EN 10088: Part 1 and 3 or EN
10029 and EN ISO 9445.
f) Successive coatings of the one component shall be tinted a different
colour to facilitate overcoating and inspection.
g) All coatings shall be applied strictly in accordance with the coating
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
h) Bolts, nuts, screws and other fasteners shall have either:
i) hot dip galvanised, in accordance with MS 739
ii) sherardized zinc coating, in accordance with BS 4921
iii) electro plating
i) Washers and other small components shall have either:
i) hot dip galvanised, in accordance with MS 740
ii) a sherardized zinc coating, in accordance with BS 4921
j) Nuts, bolts, screws and washers in contact with sewage shall be
stainless steel of Grade 316S31 steel complying with EN 10088:
Part 1 and 3 or EN 10029 and EN ISO 9445.
k) Fasteners of incompatible material to the component being fastened
shall have suitable isolating washers and sleeves.

Industry Guidelines
(III) Marine and Corrosive Environment
a) All areas within 5 km from the coast line or salt water bodies shall
be classified as marine environment. Sewerage facilities in marine
and corrosive environment e.g. where the atmosphere or soil
contains high levels of chloride, sulphates and corrosive chemical
elements or compounds shall be adequately designed to withstand
the corrosive actions of the chemicals prevalent in the environment.
Necessary protections shall be provided against all corrosive
actions of the environment.
b) Design requirement for facilities in marine and corrosive
environment shall include:
i) Two coats of sodium silicate shall be applied to all external
surfaces of concrete structures.
ii) Concrete shall be resistant to all chemical attacks and be
designed in accordance with BS 8110 Part 1: 1997.
c) Exposed metal shall be of corrosion resistant and of marine grade.
Proper smooth surface finishing shall be provided for the metal.
Unprotected metals acceptable for use are as follows:
i) SS316L
ii) Aluminium alloy
iii) Materials suitable for use in corrosive environment acceptable
by the Commission
d) All structural steelwork shall be thoroughly descaled to BS 7079
second quality and shall be painted with 2 coats of two pack epoxy
based red lead primer before leaving the manufacturer’s works. In
addition, all structural steelwork shall be provided with protective
paint for chloride, sulphate or the prevailing chemicals in the site
after installation.
e) Cathodic protection shall be provided for all load bearing steel
structures in marine environment for a minimum life of 50 years.

4.6.3 Fibre Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
Only FRP products approved by the Commission shall be used and FRP
products shall not be used for access purposes.
FRP tanks, vessels and appurtenances for sewage treatment processes shall
be designed in accordance with BS 4994 and EN 13923. The thickness of
the structural section of the FRP tank wall shall not be less than 5 mm and
shall be at least of wall thickness as given in ASTM D 4097.
All other FRP products shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 582 for
FRP laminates.
Notwithstanding any other requirements in standards, all FRP products,

including FRP tanks and vessels for sewage treatment processes, shall
conform to the following material requirements:
a) FRP properties shall be as determined by design to standards

mentioned in this Section and other relevant standards, but shall not
be less than the following values:
− Tensile strength - 80 MPa
− Tensile modulus - 7000 MPa
− Flexural strength - 140 MPa
− Flexural modulus - 6000 MPa
− Water absorption ≤0.75 %
− Barcol hardness - 40
− Operating temperature – -40oC to +50oC
− Specific gravity - ≥ 1.5
− Fire rating – ASTM E84, < 25s or Class 1 BS476
b) Unsaturated polyester resins shall be used but shall only be
isophthallic, bisphenol A fumurate or terephthalic polyester resins
meeting the requirements of Type B or C of BS 3532.
c) All surfaces shall have a resin rich layer, gel coat. Surfaces in
contact with sewage, water or any moisture shall comprise of a
resin rich layer at least 1 mm thick. All other surfaces shall
comprise of a resin rich layer at least 0.25 mm thick. Up to 10 % by
mass of corrosion resistant glass fibres, (that is, C-glass or E-CR
glass), polyester fibres or acrylic fibres may be used in the surface
layer.
d) A barrier layer shall be provided behind the surface layer and shall
be at least 1.5 mm thick. The barrier layer shall comprise of 70 to

Industry Guidelines
80 % by weight resin with the remainder by weight being E glass

or E-CR glass.
e) The structural layer shall comprise resin impregnated layers of E
glass or E-CR glass and shall comprise at least 25 % E glass or E-
CR glass. Aggregate and filler may be included.
f) E glass and E-CR glass shall conform to the requirements of:
i) EN 14020 for glass rovings
ii) EN 14118 for chopped strand mat
iii) BS 3396 for woven fabric
iv) BS 3749 for woven roving fabric
g) Glass fibres shall have a surface treatment compatible with the
manufacturing process to ensure bonding to the resin
h) Aggregates shall only be used in FRP structural layers and external
layers. Aggregates shall be clean, washed, high grade silica sand
containing not less than 95 % silica. Aggregates shall be of a size
not greater than 20 % of the thickness of the FRP structural layer
with a particle size not less than 0.05 mm and not greater than 5
mm.
i) Fillers shall only be used as a resin extender and shall comprise of
clean inert material, for example, silica, with particle size less than
0.05 mm.
j) Surfaces exposed to sunlight shall incorporate provisions to
minimise ultraviolet degradation, such as, ultraviolet inhibitors,
screening agents or pigment in the outer resin rich layer.
k) Pigments and dyes shall not normally be required, but where
required by the Commission, shall be of a type and colour specified
by the Commission.
l) FRP water tanks shall comply with the above requirements and
requirements in:
i) MS 1241: 1991 where not constructed of FRP panels
ii) MS 1390: 1995 where constructed of FRP panels
m) All design of package plants using FRP materials shall take into
account for the buoyancy effects. This effect is of concern during
high ground water conditions and emptying of the tank content
during desludging works.
n) Anchor strap shall be at least stainless steel grade 304.
4.6.4 Aluminium

a) Aluminium is found primarily as the ore bauxite and is remarkable

for its resistance to corrosion (due to the phenomenon of
passivation) and its light weight. Structural components made from
aluminium and its alloys are very important in which light weight,
durability, and strength are needed.
b) Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys shall comply with:
i) BS 1161 for structural purposes
ii) EN 485 for sheet plate and strip
iii) EN 754 for drawn tube
iv) EN 755 for bars, extruded round tubes and sections
v) EN 1676 for ingots and castings
vi) BS 4868 for profiled sheet
c) Anodic oxidation coating on aluminium shall be in accordance with
EN 12373
d) Requirements for structural design, materials, workmanship and
protection of aluminium shall be in accordance with BS 8118
4.6.5 HDPE (High Density Polyethylene)
High-density polyethylene (HDPE) is the high density version of PE

plastic. Its molecules have an extremely long carbon backbone with no
side groups. As a result, these molecules align into more compact
arrangements, accounting for the higher density of HDPE. HDPE is stiffer,
stronger, and less translucent than low-density polyethylene. HDPE is
lighter than water, and can be moulded, machined and joined together
using welding.
High-density polyethylene shall comply to the following physical

properties:-
− Tensile Strength 0.20 – 0.40 N/mm2
− Notched Impact Strength no break Kj/m2
− Thermal Coefficient of expansion 100 – 220 x 10-6
− Max Cont Use Temp 650C
− Density 0.944 – 0.965g/cm3
− Minimum Require Strength 8.0 MPa

Industry Guidelines
Section 5
Requirements for Individual
Treatment Processes
Requirements for Stages of Sewage Treatment
5.1 Introduction
All new applications for sewage treatment plant approval shall follow the
design requirements as stipulated in this section. These requirements have
been formulated as a gradual change in sewage treatment methods for
Malaysia prior to enforcement of ultimate requirements as stipulated in
Sections 3 and 4 of this Guidelines.
Design requirements for each stage of the sewage treatment process, as

shown in Figure 5.1 are given in this section.
Figure 5.2 gives an overview of the typical flow diagram and elements of a
sewage treatment plant. Figure 5.2 also shows how one facility is closely
related to another and thus has an impact upon the overall design.
Sewage treatment plants must be designed to produce an effluent quality

that conforms to either Standard A or Standard B or any other special
requirements under the provisions of the Environmental Quality Act.
The major indices are those of BOD5, Suspended Solids, COD, Oil &
Grease, Ammoniacal Nitrogen, Nitrate Nitrogen and Total Phosphorus.
The requirement to comply with absolute standards, where no failures are

permitted by law, means that new sewage treatment plants must be designed
to produce average effluent qualities well below those permitted by the
Standard figures. Design values for final effluent shall be used in the design
of new treatment works are given in Table 3.2. These design effluent levels
serve as the basis for the design requirement of each unit process given in
the following sub sections.
General ventilation systems shall be provided in compliance to the OSHA.

The potential for odour generation, its impact and treatment, shall be
considered in all aspects of design. Odour treatment equipment shall be
selected that such odours be reduced to the lowest possible level and in
compliance to the EQA.

Figure 5.1 Typical Treatment Process Flow Chart
Treatment Requirements Function

Treatment Mandatory (M) Design
Stage Processes Optional (O) Requirements
Primary Removes rocks, roots and

1 M Section 5.2 rags
Screen
Pump Lifts sewage and provides

2 Station consistent flow to the
M/O Section 5.3
treatment system
Pre
Secondary
-Treatme 3 M Section 5.4 Removes smaller/finer
nt Screen particles from sewage
Grit/Grease Removes sand, gravel and

4 M Section 5.5 other inorganic materials;
Removal separates oil & grease
Balancing
5 Tank M/O Section 5.6 Balances and equalises flow
Removes settleable
Primary Primary
6 M/O Section 5.7 solids/materials
Treatment Sedimentation
Biological Remove major polutants

7 M Section 5.8 (BOD and SS)
Treatment
Secondary Separates treated effluent

8 M Section 5.9 and settled sludge
Secondary Sedimentatio
Treatment
9 Destroy disease causing

Disinfection M Section 5.10
organisms
10 Flow Meter M Section 5.11 Measures and records flows
Reduces potential
Thickener detrimental effect on the
Bio Solids Stabilisation environment and converts
11 M/O Section 5.12 sludge to a form suitable for
Handling
Holding ultimate disposal
Dewatering
Sludge Disposal

Industry Guidelines
Figure 5.2 Typical Elements and Process Flow Diagram of a Sewage

Treatment Plant

5.2 Design of Primary Screens
5.2.1 Purpose of Primary Screens
Upon reaching the sewage treatment plant, sewage flows through the
primary screening facility which is the first stage of treatment. The screens
must be provided upstream of all inlet pump stations and shall be designed
to protect downstream processes and equipment. The purposes of primary
screens are:
a) to protect equipment from rags, wood and other debris

b) to reduce interference with in-plant flow and performance
5.2.2 Inlet Chamber
Provision for inlet chamber before the primary screen channel is necessary
for proper operational and maintenance. The summarised requirements for
inlet chamber are as follows:
Table 5.1 Requirements for Inlet Chamber
Unit
Requirements Notes
Process
Mandatory Single and
≤ 20 000 > 20 000 > 50 000 dual penstocks
Type are referring to
PE PE PE
members of
penstocks
Inlet Single Yes n/a n/a required. For
Chamber
more than 50
000 PE, the
Dual n/a Yes Yes main penstock
must be
Motorised n/a No Yes motorised.
n/a – Not applicable
a) A penstock shall be installed upstream to isolate the pump station in

the event of flooding in relation to the bypass and emergency
overflow.
b) For safety reasons, a double penstock system shall be provided at the
inlet works of all plants with PS above 20,000PE.
c) The penstock spindle shall extend to pump station ground level and
shall be suitably positioned to allow unrestricted operation of the
penstock.

Industry Guidelines
Figure 5.3 Typical Details of Double Penstock
CLEAR SPACING
MANUAL FINE SCREEN
FIRST PENSTOCK SECOND PENSTOCK
OVERFLOW PIPE
DISCHARGETO DRAIN
PRIMARY
SCREEN
INLET CHAMBER
CHAMBER
450mm
1:2 IL
5.2.3 Design Requirements for Primary Screens
Table 5.2 Provision of Primary Screens
Numbers of Primary Screen

≤ 5000 PE > 5000 PE
Manual 1 Unit -
Duty
Mechanical - 1 Unit
Manual - -
Standby
Mechanical - 1 Unit
By Pass 1 Unit 1 Unit

Table 5.3 Design Parameters for Primary Screens
Design Criteria
Description Unit Manually Mechanically
Raked Raked #
Maximum clear spacing mm 25 25
Slope to the vertical
30o – 45o 15o – 45o
Maximum approach velocity at m/s 1.0 1.0
the feed channel
Maximum flow through velocity m/s 1.0 1.0

at the screen face
Minimum freeboard mm 150* 150

3 6 3
Estimated volume of screenings m / 10 m 30 See Figure 5.4
per volume of sewage
screenings skip storage capacity day 7 7
Minimum channel width mm 500 500
Minimum channel depth mm 500 500
RC Staircase with riser detail 1 unit Anti-skid and Anti-skid and
non-corrosive non-corrosive
Notes:
* Designer shall ensure that with 50% of blockage at the face of screen, sufficient
freeboard is provided to prevent the approach channel from overflowing
# Washing and dewatering of screenings shall be provided.
5.2.4 General Requirements
All plants must include:
a) An emergency manual bypass screen. In the event of system failure

and/or power outages, the flow shall be automatically directed to
the bypass. It shall also be able to cope with maximum flow.
b) Hand railings, kick plates, standing platforms and other safety
features to improve maintenance
Screen chambers must be of open channel construction with proper

ventilation. Forced ventilation must be used if chambers are enclosed.
Screens must be designed to withstand the flushing velocity.

Industry Guidelines
In the event of the manual bypass screen being blocked, sewage must be
able to flow over the top of the screen without causing excessive backup
flooding or overflows.
Chambers design must have taken into consideration necessary health and
safety aspects. The chamber must also be hydraulically efficient to prevent
the settlement of solids in the chamber.
Macerators and communitors as replacements for primary screens are

generally not recommended. It may be considered if the consultant is able
to provide good engineering reasons for its application.
Reinforced concrete staircase with proper handrailing must be provided to

access screen chambers.
Shaftless screw conveyors and belt conveyors may be used where required.
The screw conveyor shall be equipped with easy to remove covers. The
frame and support of screw conveyor shall be of stainless steel grade 304
while the screw shall be of high tensile steel. The belt conveyors shall be of
heavy duty reinforced rubber belts on a protected mild steel frame.
Conveyors should normally be installed on a very slight grade to allow
drainage, with foul water returned to the inlet channel.
All screenings raked from mechanical screen shall be dropped into a skip.
A proper standpipe shall be provided and located within 3m to the screen

chamber
Figure 5.5 and 5.6 illustrate typical arrangement of screen chambers of

various depths.
Refer also to relevant clause of MS 1228 for more details.

Figure 5.4 Quantities of Screenings Collected From Primary Screens
100
80
Average
Maximum
Screenings, m 3/ 10 6m 3 of Sewage
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Opening Between Bars, cm

Industry Guidelines
Figure 5.5 Typical Drawing of Screen Chamber based on depth

(<5m for different PE)
DRAIN
CONCRETE APRON DRAIN
LAID TO FALL WP
CONCRETE APRON
LAID TO FALL WP
RAMP
DOW N RAMP
DO W N
MECHANICAL COARSE
M.S GRATING COVER
SCREEN M.S GRATING COVER MANUAL COARSE
INCOMING SEW ER SCREEN
INCOMING SEW ER
CHAIN GUARD CHAIN GUARD
PENSTOCK PENSTOCK
A A
A
A R.C STAIRCASE TO DN
ENGR'S DETAIL
R.C STAIRCASE TO DN
ENGR'S DETAIL
PLAN VIEW PLAN VIEW

(PE < 5000) (PE > 5000)
MECHANICAL
COARSE SCREEN
PENSTOCK
PENSTOCK
SCREENINGS SCREENINGS
COLLECTION BIN COLLECTION BIN
HANDRAIL HANDRAIL
HANDRAIL HANDRAIL
R.C STAIRCASE R.C STAIRCASE

TO ENGR'S DETAIL TO ENGR'S DETAIL
< 5m
> 5m
R.C PERFORATED SLAB
R.C PERFORATED SLAB
CAT LADDER CAT LADDER
S.S PERFORATED
TROUGH
OPENINGS
OPENINGS
INCOMING SEW ER INCOMING SEW ER
STOP LOG STOP LOG
SECTION A-A SECTION A-A

Figure 5.6 Typical Drawing of Screen Chamber based on Depth.

(>5m for different PE)
DRAIN
CONC. APRON LAID TO FALL WP
RAMP DOWN DRAIN
CONC. APRON WP
LAID TO FALL
MECHANICAL COARSE SCREEN
RAMP
GRATING COVER DOWN
INCOMING SEWER
GRATING
COVER
INCOMING SEWER
CHAIN GUARD
PENSTOCK
CHAIN GUARD A
A R.C STAIRCASE TO A A PENSTOCK
ENGR'S DETAIL
R.C STAIRCASE TO
ENGR'S DETAIL
PLAN
(PE < 5000) PLAN
(PE > 5000)
PENSTOCK PENSTOCK
SCREENINGS COLLECTION BIN SCREENINGS COLLECTION BIN
HANDRAIL
HANDRAIL
HANDRAIL HANDRAIL
< 5m
PERFORATED SLAB
< 5m
R.C STAIRCASE R.C STAIRCASE
TO ENGR'S DETAIL TO ENGR'S DETAIL
S.S PERFORATED
TROUGH
INCOMING SEWER
INCOMING SEWER
STOP LOG STOP LOG
SECTION A-A SECTION A-A

Industry Guidelines
5.3 Design of Pump Stations
5.3.1 Purpose of Pump Stations
Inlet pump stations must be preceded by primary screens to protect the

pumps from being damaged or clogged. The inlet pumps of the treatment
works must be capable of handling raw unscreened sewage. Water pumps
must not be used as they are not designed to cope with matters that may be
found in sewage and the variability and quantity of sewage flow. The
purposes of pump stations are:
a) to lift sewage to a higher point for treatment

b) to provide consistent inlet flows to the treatment system
c) to prevent overflow of raw sewage
5.3.2 Design Requirements
(I) Structural Requirements
a) Substructure shall be constructed with reinforced concrete using

cement resistant to chemical attack, aggressive soils and
groundwater.
b) Safe and suitable access to the wells shall be provided.
c) Internal walls shall be made resistant to sulphide corrosion by
coating with high alumina cement or approved equivalent coating, if
cement used is not resistant to the chemical attack.
d) A controlled overflow from the last manhole upstream of the pump
installation shall be provided to allow emergency maintenance
works.
e) Access shall be provided at all locations where operation and
maintenance works take place.
f) Static screen shall be provided at specific locations where it needs to
protect downstream unit processes.
g) Access covers shall be hinged with a lifting weight not exceeding
16 kg.

(II) Ventilation Requirements
a) Ventilation shall be provided for all hazardous zones of the pump

station.
b) Below ground pits shall have mechanical ventilation.
c) Separate ventilation shall be provided for wet wells and dry wells.
d) Lighting systems shall be interconnected with ventilation.
e) Permanent ventilation rate and air changes shall comply with
Section 6 of this Guidelines
(III) Odour Control Requirements
a) Isolate odorous gases from general ventilation by containing

identified odour generating sources with a separate local exhaust
system.
b) Containment of the odour sources shall be by installing
lightweight and corrosion resistant covers/enclosures designed for
practical operation and maintenance works.
c) Local exhaust rates for containment shall be designed to provide a
negative pressure preventing build up of toxic, corrosive or
explosive gases and to include provision for process air or air
displaced by changes in the level of liquid inside the covered
space.
d) The odourus air in the local exhaust system shall be conveyed
through well designed and balanced ductworks by a centrifugal fan
to an effective odour treatment system.
e) Odour treatment equipment shall be selected such that odour is
reduced to the lowest possible level and in compliance to the EQA.
f) In situation where specific gases such as hydrogen sulphide and
ammonia are significantly present, provide a pre-scrubber unit
upstream of the main odour treatment equipment.
g) Containment, exhaust and treatment shall be designed as an
integrated package.
h) Consideration must be given to the life span of the odour control
system and associated costs in operating and maintaining such a
system.
(IV) Wet Wells Requirements
a) Suction channels shall be designed to avoid "dead zones", i.e.,

prevent solids and scum accumulation. All “dead zones” shall be
chamfered.

Industry Guideline
b) Benching shall be such that to minimise deposition of solid matters

on the floor or walls of wet wells. The minimum slope of benching
shall be 45o to the horizontal.
c) Benching shall preferably be extended up to the pump intake.
d) Minimum hopper bottom slope shall be 1.5 vertical to 1.0 horizontal.
Tapered slope shall be provided up to the suction section.
e) Automatic flushing of grit and solids is recommended for plants of
PE > 2,000.
f) The difference between stop and start levels shall be a maximum of
900 mm and a minimum of 450 mm.
g) The difference in level between start or stop of duty and assist
pumps shall be greater than or equal to 150 mm.
h) The minimum internal width of wet well shall not less than 2m
i) Where possible, wet wells shall be open and guarded by a handrail
or open mesh grating. The grating shall be easily and safely
removed.
Figure 5.7 – Typical Dimensions of Wet Well

Submersible Pump Station
MIN 2000
QO (I/S)
INCOMING SEWER
Qi (I/S)
D2 HIGH LEVEL ALARM
STANDBY CUT IN LEVEL

≥ 150
CUT IN LEVEL
d
CUT OUT LEVEL

s
LOW LEVEL ALARM

k
D1
Note :
Q1 = Incoming flowrate
QO = Forcemain Discharge rate
D2 = Forcemain Diameter, min 100
d = Difference between stop & start level, Min 450 Max 900
s = Minimum submergence, depends on manufacturer recommendation
k = Minimum clearance between pump suction and wet-well invert
All dimension are in mm unless otherwise state

Figure 5.8 – Typical Dimensions of Dry Well

Submersible Pump Station
IN
Qi COMI
(I/S NG
) SE
W ER
HIGH LEVEL ALARM
3
4 STANDBY CUT IN LEVEL
150
CUT IN LEVEL
D
CUT OUT LEVEL
LOW LEVEL ALARM/EMERGENCY

CUTOUT
D2 to D2
D2 to D2
2
QO (I/S)
150
D1
D2
150 (min)
ALLOW ADDITIONAL DEPTH
FOR SOLID HEAVY OBJECTS
IN
Qi COM
(I/S I NG
) SE
WE
R
HIGH LEVEL ALARM
STANDBY CUT IN LEVEL

150
CUT IN LEVEL
D
CUT OUT LEVEL

LOW LEVEL ALARM/EMERGENCY
S
CUTOUT
D2
D2 TO D2
D1 Q0 (I/S)
150
Note :
Q1 = Incoming flowrate
ALLOW ADDITIONAL DEPTH
FOR SOLID HEAVY OBJECTS
QO = Forcemain Discharge rate
D2 = Bellmouth Diameter
D1 = Suction Diameter, Min 100
D = Difference between stop start level, Min 450 and Max 900
S = Minimum depth above pump intake to prevent vortex formation
(V) Lighting Requirements
a) Wet wells and dry wells shall be adequately lit.

b) Electrical installations shall be water proof and vapour proof or
explosion proof.
c) If lights are fitted outside the well, then a spotlight system may be
used to provide adequate illumination.

Industry Guideline
(VI) Level Controls
a) Either floats or ultrasonic level controller may be used for the start-
stop levels of pumps. Instrument with environmental friendly
features are recommended.
b) Ultrasonic level control is recommended due to its clog-free nature.
c) Non-mercury type floats are recommended.
d) Hollow tube electrodes are not acceptable.
e) Level controller shall be placed where they are not affected by the
turbulence of incoming flow and where they can be safely removed.
(VII) Pump Hydraulic Design
a) The submission of pump hydraulic design and performance shall

include:
i) System curves
ii) Pump curves
iii) Operating points of pumps with respect to flow and total
dynamic head (TDH)
iv) Operating characteristics such as efficiency, horsepower and
motor rating
b) Pump should be operating within their best efficiency range at
normal operating condition.
c) Pumps are to be equipped with an auto restart mechanism in the
event of power failure.
d) Dry well mounted pumps shall be equipped with auxiliary services
such as cooling and gland seal water supply.
e) Pumps equipped with cutting or macerating facilities are not
acceptable.
f) Guide rail, lifting device and other wet well fittings must be
fabricated of stainless steel that is corrosion resistant. The use of hot
dip galvanised iron is not recommended.
g) Horizontal installation of pumps is not allowed. All pumps shall be
installed vertical, unless the consultant is able to provide good
engineering reasons for horizontal installation.
a) Drainage of dry wells and valve pits shall be provided. Drainage

lines shall be equipped with back flow protection to ensure that the
chamber is not flooded.

b) The wet well shall not be housed with a building structure.

c) Where separate valve pits are used, the connecting pipes shall
incorporate at least two flexible joints to allow for differential
settlement.
d) Pipe Work
i) Pipe work shall be of ductile iron or cast iron with cement
internal lining. Other approved material by the Director
General may be used.
ii) External surface of pipe work in chambers and wells shall be
epoxy coated.
iii) Buried ductile iron pipe shall have polyethylene sleeving.
iv) Pipe within wells and pits shall have flanged joints, while pipe
laid in the ground shall have spigot and socket joints.
v) Pipe work shall be adequately supported on concrete plinths or
steel structural supports.
vi) Flanges shall be located at least 150 mm away from structures.
vii) Dismantling joints such as bends shall be provided.
viii) Pumping thrust shall be resisted using pipe supports inside
chambers and by mass concrete thrust blocks poured against
undisturbed soil in the ground outside chambers.
ix) No welding joints are allowed.
e) Valves
i) Gate valves are preferred with rising spindles operated by a tee
piece
ii) The uses of counterweights are recommended. Tapping (12 mm
BSP) shall be located upstream and downstream of check
valves
Also refer to additional requirements in relevant Clause of MS 1228.

Industry Guideline
Figure 5.9 Typical Details of Wet-well Pump Station
MECH. COARSE SCREEN

INCOMING SEWER
STEPS
GRATING COVER V.C.P
OVERFLOW PIPE
DISCHARGE TO DRAIN STAND PIPE
CONC. APRON
COLLECTION BIN
CLEAR SPACING
S.STEEL MANUAL OVERFLOW
FINE SCREEN CHAMBER INFLUENT PUMP
A PRIMARY SCREEN A
GRATING COVER
EXPLOSION PROOF
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 SPOT LIGHT
PUMP SUMP
CHECK VALVE
S.STEEL HANDRAIL FLEXIBLE COUPLING
STEPS
PENSTOCK GATE VALVE
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DELIVERY PIPE
R.C STAIRCASE TO ENGR'S DETAIL
PLAN VIEW
LIFTING I-BEAM C/W
CARRIER
MECH. COARSE SCREEN
HANDRAIL
CHAIN GUARD
CHECK VALVE
CLEAR SPACING PENSTOCK
MANUAL FINE SCREEN FLEXIBLE COUPLING
GATE VALVE
OVERFLOW DELIVERY PIPE
PIPE DISCHARGE
TO DRAIN NON-EXPLOSION SPOT LIGHT
DELIVERY PIPE
GUIDERAIL
OVERFLOW
S.S PERFORATED
CHAMBER TROUGH PUMP SUMP LIFTING CHAIN
PRIMARY SCREEN
CHAMBER
CONC. SLAB
R.C WALL TO
IL ENGR'S DETAIL
FRP STOP LOG C/W

1:2 HAND WHEEL OPENING
IL IL
ALARM
START
MANUAL COARSE SCREEN
STOP
SECTION A-A

Figure 5.10 Typical Details of Dry-well Pump Station
OVERFLOW PIPE DISCHARGE

TO MONSOON DRAIN
OVERFLOW CHAMBER
3 LAYER CONC. VENTILATION

DRAIN LIQUID RETURN FROM OTHER UNIT PROCESSES BLOCK AT TOP AND BOTTOM LEVEL
RAMP DOWN WP
CONC. APRON LAID TO FALL
FORCEMAIN

A
A CONC. THRUST BLOCK.

12
GATE VALVE.
13 11
14 10
15 9
NCOMING SEWER
16 8
AIR EXTRACTOR FAN CHECK VALVE. EXTRACTOR FAN
G.I CHAIN GUARD 17 7
18 6
PENSTOCK R.C STAIRCASE TO ENGR'S DETAIL.
19 5
GRATING COVER 3 LAYER CONC. CONC. THRUST BLOCK. 20 4
VENTILATION BLOCK
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 G.I CHAIN GUARD. AT TOP AND BOTTOM 21 3
LEVEL 22 2 CONCRETE VENTILATION
23 1 BLOCK AT TOP AND BOTTOM LEVEL
DN
CHAIN GUARD.
DN
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SPOT LIGHT ADJUSTABLE GLASS

CHEQUER PLATE LOUVRES WINDOW
BRICKWALL C/W CEMENT DOOR

PLASTER ON BOTH SIDES
DRY PIT PUMPS
PLAN VIEW
COPPER TYPE LIFTING I-BEAM C/W

LIGHTNING ARRESTOR CARRIER R.C GUTTER TO ENGR'S DETAIL
RAIN WATER DOWN PIPE

TO NEAREST SUMP
DOOR
SCREENINGS COLLECTION BIN
PENSTOCK BRICKWALL C/W
CEMENT PLASTER ON BOTH SIDES
WINDOW
HANDRAIL CHEQUER PLATE
3 LAYER CONC. VENTILATION
BLOCK
HANDRAIL
WET WELL
DRY WELL
PERFORATED SLAB
CAT LADDER
OPENINGS
ALARM
CHECK VALVE 2nd. STANDBY PUMP START
1st. STANDBY PUMP START
INCOMING SEWER 2nd. DUTY PUMP START
(FLOAT SWITCH) GATE VALVE 1st.. DUTY PUMP START
ALL PUMP STOP
STOP LOG
SUMP BWL
DEWATERING PUMP
DRY PIT PUMPS
SECTION VIEW

Industry Guideline


Industry Guideline
5.4 Design of Secondary Screens
5.4.1 Purpose of Secondary Screens
After the inlet pump station, further screening is required to reduce the
remaining floating matter and finer particles in the sewage that will disrupt
the treatment process downstream. The purposes of secondary screens are:
a) to remove material such as plastic, paper, cloth and other particles

that may cause problems to the treatment process downstream
b) to minimise blockages in sludge handling and treatment facilities
Plants of all sizes must be installed with secondary screens. The channel
shall be designed for Qpeak or pump flow whichever is greater. Approach
channel shall be design to ensure good contribution of velocity
A minimum of two screens are required for duty and standby. Facility for a
screened by-pass must be provided in the event of clogging. Where
mechanically cleaned screening devices are installed auxiliary manually
cleaned screen shall be provided.
Table 5.5 Provision Requirement of Secondary Screens
Numbers of Secondary Screen

≤5000 >5000
Manual 1 Unit -
Duty
Mechanical - 1 Unit
Manual - -
Standby
Mechanical - 1 Unit
Bypass Screen 1 Unit 1 Unit

Requirements for Individual Treatment Processes
Table 5.6 Design Parameters for Secondary Screens
Design Criteria
Description Unit Manually Mechanically
Raked Raked #
Maximum clear spacing mm 12 12
Slope to the vertical 30o – 45o 15o – 45o
Maximum approach velocity at m/s 1.0 1.0
the feed channel
Maximum flow through velocity m/s 1.0 1.0
at the screen face
Minimum freeboard mm 150* 150
Estimated volume of screenings m3 / 106 m3 See Figure 5.4
per volume of sewage
Screenings skip storage capacity day 7 7
Minimum channel width mm 500 500
Minimum channel depth mm 500 500
RC Staircase with riser detail 1 unit Anti-skid and Anti-skid and
non-corrosive non-corrosive
Notes:
* Designer shall ensure that with 50% of blockage at the face of screen, sufficient
freeboard is provided to prevent the approach channel from overflowing
# Washing and dewatering of screenings shall be provided.
5.5 Design of Grit and Grease Chambers
5.5.1 Purposes of Grit and Grease Chambers
This unit process is important to minimise problems associated with grit and
grease. Grit creates problems to pumps and also sludge digestion and
dewatering facilities. Grease creates problems at the clarifier and is carried
over in the final effluent.
In grit removal system, grit or discrete particles that have subsiding

velocities or specific gravities substantially greater than those of organic
putrescible solids, e.g. eggshells, sands, gravel are removed by gravitate
settlement or centrifugal separation. Same principle apply to oil and grease
removal system, where free oil and grease globules lighter than water rise
through the liquid and skimmed from the top surface.

Industry Guidelines
The particles must be removed at an early stage of the process because:
a) the grit particles cannot be broken down by any biological treatment

b) the grid particles are abrasive and wear down equipment
c) the biological treatment in sewage treatment works is not designed
to degrade grease.
A manual bypass shall be provided. In case of grit removal system failure

and/or power outages, the flow shall be automatically directed to the bypass.
Where mechanical grit separator is used, they shall be installed at an angle

of at least 10° to allow drainage and foul water to be returned to the inlet
channel.
Where manual systems are used, allow for safe and easy access to remove
grit to a storage bin.
If pump systems are used, the suction pipe shall be short and straight. Tees
and short radius bends shall be avoided, if at all possible. Flanges at
strategic locations shall be provided so that they can be dismantled to
remove any blockages.
The mechanical oil and grease skimming device shall be designed to

minimise the water being remove while skimming the oil and grease.
Sand pit may be used for further dewatering of the grease removed before
ultimate disposal. The drainage from the sand pit shall be returned to the
inlet channel for further treatment.

Table 5.7 Provision Requirement of

Grit and Grease Removal System
Number of Unit Processes
≤ 5000 PE > 5000 PE
i) Grit Removal System
Duty Manual 1 Unit @ design flow -
Mechanical -1 Unit @ design flow (up
to 10 000 PE)
-
-2 unit @ 50% design flow
each ( >10000 PE)
Standby Manual 1 Unit @ design flow -
Mechanical - -
Bypass - Yes
ii) Grease Removal System
Duty Manual 1 Unit -
Mechanical -1 Unit @ design flow (up
to 10 000 PE)
-
-2 unit @ 50% design flow
each ( >1000 PE)
Standby Manual 1 Unit @ design flow -
Mechanical - -
Bypass Yes Yes
5.5.3 Design Criteria
Design criteria are given in Tables 5.8 and 5.9.
Table 5.8 Design Parameters for Grease Chambers
Design Criteria
Description Unit
PE ≤ 5,000* > 5,000 > 5,000
Grease removal - Simple manual Manual interceptor Mechanical
Chamber type - Rectangular Baffled tank Aerated type

Minimum detention
min 3 3 3
time (Qpeak)
Grit and grease storage
period before off-site day 30 7 7
disposal
Note:
* Combined grit & grease chamber is allowed. If combined, then total detention time
shall comply to 6minutes at Qpeak.

Industry Guidelines
Table 5.9 Design Parameters for Grit Chambers
Design Criteria
Description Unit
PE ≤ 5,000* >5.000PE >5,000PE
Grit removal - Manual Mechanical Mechanical
(tanker)
Chamber type - Horizontal Square, rotary or Aerated
flow (2 units vortex type simple
required for mechanised grit
duty and chamber
standby during
cleaning)
vortex also
acceptable
Minimum
detention time at minute 3 3 3
Qpeak
Maximum gravity
flow through m/s 0.20 0.20 0.20
velocity at Qpeak
Maximum
centrifugal flow m/s n/a <1.0 <1.0
through velocity
Head loss
- 35% of depth -
(at parshall flume)
Aeration l/s/meter
- - 10.0
requirement length of tank
Chamber
dimension:
Manufacturer’s Manufacturer’
Depth: Width - 1:2
Specification Specification
Length: Width
2:1
Estimated grit m3/103 m3 of

0.03 0.03 0.03
quantity sewage
Washing and
- No Yes Yes
dewatering of grit
Notes:
• Air lift pump for removal of grit is not acceptable
• Water depth in tank to be controlled by weir outlet.

5.6 Design of Balancing Tanks

Balancing tanks are mandatory for all treatment processes that are not
designed at peak flow. The tanks are effective means of equalising sewage
flow. For extended aeration plants that are designed with a retention time of
more than 18 hours and clarifiers designed at peak flow, the use of
balancing tanks is not required.
5.6.1 Purposes of Balancing Tanks
The purposes of balancing tanks are to:
a) prevent flow variations entering secondary treatment processes

b) reduce hydraulic loading into secondary treatment processes
c) reduce potential overflows that may cause health hazard and
pollution
The design requirements for balancing tanks are:
a) All balancing tanks must be completely aerated and mixed.

b) Flow control shall be by a non-mechanical constant flow device,
such as an orifice, in order to avoid double pumping.
c) Allowance must be made for an emergency overflow.
d) Bypass and drain down facilities as well as suitable access for
cleaning shall be provided.
e) A dead water depth of 0.6 - 1.0 m is normally required.
f) For plants with PE > 10000, where balancing tank is used,
minimum 1 unit of balancing tank shall be provided. The design
flow of the upstream and downstream unit processes are
recommended as follow:
i) Where no balancing tanks is provided, design flow of unit
process at
Upstream = Peak/pumped flow
Downstream = Peak/pumped flow
ii. Where balancing tank is provided, design flow of unit process at
Upstream = Peak/pumped flow
Downstream = Average flow

Industry Guidelines
Table 5.10 Design Parameters for Balancing Tanks
Description Unit Design Criteria

Volume of tanks m3 1.5 hr detention at Qpeak
Mixing power requirements W/m3 of
5 at TWL
sewage
Aeration 1 m3 of air supply for
m3 air/hour/m3
every m3 of sewage
sewage
stored per hour at TWL
Overflow by-pass to down-
- Yes
stream unit requirement
5.7 Design of Primary Sedimentation Stage

At primary sedimentation stage, the velocity of sewage is reduced to subside
settleable suspended organic matters in the sewage. The settled matter is
known as primary sludge.
5.7.1 Purposes
The purposes of primary sedimentation are:
a) to remove maximum amount of pollutants such as settleable solids

quickly and economically
b) to separate sewage into sludge and settled sewage, which by being
treated separately are normally dealt with more efficiently and
economically
c) When used as a preliminary step for further treatment, the main
function of primary sedimentation tank is to reduce the organic
loadings on the secondary treatment units and is a essential
component of secondary sewage treatment.
The design requirements of primary sedimentation include the followings:
a) Provide sufficient time for maximum settling under quiescent

conditions. Therefore, design factors require careful consideration
include: overflow rate, detention period, weir-loading rate, shape
and dimensions of the basin, inlet and outlet structures, and sludge
removal system.
b) Tanks can either be rectangular, circular or upward flow (square).

c) Provisions for the removal of sludge on a daily basis.

d) Holding tanks for wasted sludge must be provided.
e) V-notch weirs with baffle shall be provided at the outlet. Weirs
shall be adjustable with notches 100 mm deep. Typical variation in
water level shall be no more than 50 mm under all conditions.
f) Multiple hopper are not permitted.
g) Scum skimming shall be provided to remove both floating
materials and scum. These materials can be either discharged to
bio-solid holding tank or sand drying bed. They shall not be
returned to the preliminary treatment units.
h) Flow distribution channel/chamber shall be provided for flow
isolation or equal flow distribution.
i) Rectangular tank
i) Sludge hopper shall have side slopes of 60° or more from
horizontal with the sludge pump located in a pit at hopper
invert level. The length of suction pipe shall be minimised.
Provision for withdrawal pipe from the tanks shall be
provided.
ii) The capacity of hopper shall be equivalent to 2hours
detention time at Qpeak.
iii) Additional water depth of minimum 400mm should be
provided above the hopper in the vertical side-wall section
between the top of the hopper and the top water level. The
side-wall height should not be less than 400mm.
iv) Equalise flow distribution across the inlet of the tank shall be
achieved using a multi-port wall and baffles.
j) Circular Tank
i) Circular tanks shall be no more than 50 m in diameter and
minimum water depth shall be 3.0 m.
ii) Circular tanks with more than 30m diameter shall be
provided with perimeter walkway for cleaning the weir and
shall have appropriate drive system.
(k) The floor slab of the sedimentation tank shall be of reinforced
concrete type construct to gradient to enhance the sludge scraping
effectiveness.

Industry Guidelines
Table 5.11 Design Parameters for Primary Sedimentation

Sedimentation followed by secondary treatment
Detention time at Qpeak hr 2
Surface overflow rate at Qpeak
3 2
- circular (maximum)* - m /m /d 45
rectangular (maximum) 3 2
m /m /d 45
3
Weir loading at Qpeak m /m/d 150
Upward flow rate at Qpeak m/hr 1.2 - 2.0
Sizing of rectangular tanks
Length : Width > 3:1
Min Water Depth m 2.5
Width : Depth 1 : 1 to 2.5 : 1
Sizing of circular tanks
Min. Side water depth m >3.0
Floor slope wall 1:12
5.8 Design of Biological Treatment Stage
5.8.1 Introduction
Biological treatment is the heart of the sewage treatment process. It is the

processes where the dissolved and non- settleable organic material
remaining in the sewage are removed by living organisms.
For reasons of long term whole life economics, ease of operation and
maintenance, consistent effluent standards and standardisation, the
following types of biological treatment processes are recommended for use
in Malaysia.
Suspended Growth System

a) Conventional activated sludge system
b) Extended aeration activated sludge/Oxidation Ditch (OD) system
c) Sequencing Batch Reactor (SBR)/(Intermittent Decant Extended
Aeration (IDEA)

Attached Growth System

a) Rotating biological contactor system
b) Trickling filter System
c) Hybrid System/Combination multistage design
All plants must be strictly designed to meet DOE Standard A / Standard B

requirements including, nitrification and denitrification to reduce ammonia
and a total nitrogen removal level that ensure compliance with the
requirement stipulated in Section 3 earlier. Total Phosphorus removal must
also be taken into account for plants where treated effluent is to be
discharged into stagnant water bodies.
Mass balance calculation must be computed and submitted for all biological
treatment system and other unit processes proposed for the STP.
5.8.2 Conventional Activated Sludge System (CAS)
5.8.2.1 General Description
The conventional activated sludge process is one of the many versions of

the activated-sludge process. The activated sludge process is most suitably
used where land is limited and expensive, and where large volumes must be
treated economically, without creating nuisance to neighbours.
The process involves the production of activated mass of micro organisms

capable of stabilising sewage aerobically. This is achieved by introducing
organic waste, produced from pre-treatment and primary treatment
facilities, into reactors where suspended aerobic bacterial culture oxidises
the organic matter into stable matters. These active bacteria cultures are
commonly known as activated sludge. During the process, new bacteria cell
are also produced.
5.8.2.2 Design Requirements for CAS
For the design of conventional activated sludge system, the aeration tank
shall be preceded with primary sedimentation system. An appropriate
amount of the bacteria culture, known as activated sludge must be recycled
to the upstream of the reactor while the remaining excess sludge must be
removed at secondary sedimentation system.
All conventional activated sludge system used at STPs for Class 3, Class 4
and at where requested by the Commission must be designed with anoxic
zone to achieve a total nitrogen removal in order to comply with the
requirements in Section 3 of this Guidelines, as well as to minimise
potential rising sludge at secondary sedimentation system. The anoxic zone
must be mixed without inducing dissolve oxygen. Sludge treatment and

Industry Guidelines
dewatering must be available on-site to handle the large quantity of unstable

sludge generated.
Table 5.12 Design Parameters for Conventional

Activated Sludge System

Primary Sedimentation System Must be provided
Minimum number of aeration tanks 2
F/M ratio 0.25 - 0.50
Hydraulic retention time (HRT) hrs 6-16 (for system where
only ammonia removal is
require)
12-16 (for plants require
total nitrogen removal)
Oxygen requirements (for BOD and kgO2/kg substrate 2.0
ammonia nitrogen removal)
Mixed liquor suspended solids mg/l 1,500-3,000
(MLSS) Typical: 2,500
Dissolved oxygen (DO) level in tank mg/l 1.0
Aeration Device rating Continuous, 24 hrs
Sludge yield kg sludge 0.8-1.0
produced/kg BOD5
consumed
Sludge age # day 5-10
3
Waste activated sludge (WAS) m /d Refer to equation below †
Return activated sludge flow, QRAS m3/d MLSS
× Q avg
Cu − MLSS
Cu is underflow concentration
QRAS / QINFLOW 0.75-1.0
Mixed liquor suspended solids 4 – 6 of Qavg
recirculation for denitrification
purpose
RAS pump rating hrs/day 24
Organic loading kg BOD5/kg 0.25-0.5
MLSS
Volumetric loading kg BOD5/m3.d 0.3-0.6
Minimum mixing requirement W/ m3 20

Table 5.12 Design Parameters for Conventional

Activated Sludge System (cont.)

Tank dimension
Water depth m 3–5
Length:Width 3:1
Max width of joined tank m <30
total solids in aeration tank

# Sludge Age =
excess sludge wasting / day + solids in effluent
⎡ VT × MLSS ⎤
† ⎢
⎢⎣ θ sludge ⎥⎦
[
⎥ − Q avg × SSeff ]
WAS =
Cu
Where:
vT = volume of reactor (m3)
MLSS = mixed liquor suspended solids (kg/m3)
θsludge = sludge age (days)
Qavg = average flow (m3/day)
SSeff = effluent suspended solids (kg/m3)
Cu = underflow concentration (kg/m3)
Refer Table D1 and D2 for aeration equipment duty / standby and also to
relevant clause of MS 1228 for more details.
5.8.3 Extended Aeration System (EA)
5.8.3.1 General Discription
The extended aeration process is similar to the conventional activated

sludge process except that it operates in the endogenous respiration phase of
the growth curve, which requires a low organic loading and long aeration
time. The system produces high MLSS concentration, high RAS pumping
rate and low sludge wastage.
The advantage of having long hydraulic retention times is that it allows the
plant to operate effectively over widely varying flow and waste loadings.
Secondary clarifiers must be designed to the variations in hydraulic
loadings and high MLSS concentrations associated with this process.

Industry Guidelines
5.8.3.2 Design Requirements for EA
EA plants shall be designed as either plug flow or completely mixed.

Anoxic zone at the head of the reactor must be provided for denitrification.
The anoxic zone must be mixed without inducing dissolved oxygen
For Oxidation ditches, the minimum velocity within the channel shall be
sufficient to keep the activated sludge in suspension. The minimum velocity
within the channel shall not be less than 0.3 m/s. The tank configuration
and aeration and mixing devices shall promote unidirectional channel flow,
so that the energy used for aeration is sufficient to provide mixing in a
system with a relatively long hydraulic retention time.
Table 5.13 Design Parameters for Extended Aeration

Minimum number of aeration tanks 2*
F/M ratio 0.05 - 0.1
Hydraulic retention time (HRT) hrs 18 - 24
Oxygen requirements(for BOD and kgO2/kgsubstrate 2.0
ammonia nitrogen removal)
Mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) mg/l 2,500 - 5,000
Typical: 3,000
Dissolved oxygen (DO) level in tank mg/l 2.0
Sludge yield kg sludge produced/kg 0.4 (at 24 hrs HRT)
BOD5 consumed 0.6 (at 18 hrs HRT)
Sludge age # day >20
3
Waste activated sludge (WAS) m /d Refer to equation †
MLSS
Return activated sludge flow, QRAS m3/d × Q avg
Cu − MLSS
Cu is underflow
concentration
RAS pump rating hours/day 24
Recirculation ratio, QRAS/QINFLOW 0.5 - 1.0
MLSS recycle ratio 4 – 6 times of Qavg
3
Volumetric loading Kg BOD5/m .d 0.1 - 0.4
Minimum mixing requirement W/m3 20
Tank dimension
Water depth m 3–5
Length:Width ratio 3:1
Max width of joined tank m <60

Notes:
#
Sludge Age = total solids in aeration tank
⎡ VT × MLSS ⎤
†
⎢
⎢⎣ θ sludge ⎥⎦
[
⎥ − Q avg × SSeff ]
excess sludge wasting/day + solids in effluen WAS =
Cu
Where:
vT = volume of reactor (m3)
MLSS = mixed liquor suspended solids (kg/m3)
θsludge = sludge age (days)
Qavg = average flow (m3/day)
SSeff = effluent suspended solids (kg/m3)
Cu = underflow concentration (kg/m3)
Refer Table D1 and D2 for aeration equipment duty / standby and also to
relevant clause of MS 1228 for more details.
Figure 5.11 – Fine Bubble Diffuse Air Extended Aeration System
Anoxic Zone Aeration Tank Flow Final Clarifier

Distribution
Effluent
Screens, Grit Removal
To River
Raw
Sewage
Inlet
Sewage
Pump Station
Return Sludge
Pump Station
Liquor
Chemical
Dosing
Sludge Storage Area Mechanical Sludge

Dewatering
Mechanical Sludge
Thickener
Sludge Holding Tank

Ultimate Disposal
Sludge Drying Bed
OPTIONAL

Industry Guidelines
Figure 5.12 – Oxidation Ditch Activated Sludge System
F low
M echanical Rotor Flow F inal Clarifier M easurem ent
Distribution E ffluent
S creens, G rit R em oval To River
R aw
S ewage
Inlet O xidation D itch
S ewage
P um p Station
Return S ludge
P um p S tation
Chem ical
Dosing
S ludge S torage A rea M echanical S ludge

Dewatering
Mechanical Sludge
Thickener
S ludge Holding Tank

U ltim ate D isposal
S ludge D rying B ed
O PTIO N AL
5.8.4 Rotating Biological Contactors (RBC)
Rotating biological contactors use a series of rotating media for biological

treatment. The rotating medium, typically made from sheets of high quality
plastic, provides a surface on which organisms grow. As the media rotate,
the fixed film biomass is in contact with organic pollutions in sewage and
oxygen in atmosphere alternately. Layers of biomass are sheared from the
surface of the media during the rotation to prevent overgrown of the fixed
film.
RBCs are conventionally submerged to 40% of disc diameter. Increased

submergence of discs up to about 90% is also acceptable if sufficient air
supply is provided at the base of the tank. This system is normally called
the submerged biological contactor (SBC).
5.8.4.2 Design Requirements for RBC Plants
Preceding the RBC must be a primary sedimentation tank or a secondary

screening with <6 mm opening. A flow balancing tank must also be
provided unless the plant is designed to peak flow.
Units must be covered for aesthetics and odour control, and only approved
media types are accepted.

Table 5.14 Design Parameters for RBC Plants

Minimum number of stages 3
Total BOD5 specific loading g/m2/d 5 - 10
Total tank volume Based on 2 hrs at Qavg
Sludge yield kg excess sludge/ 0.9
kg BOD5 consumed
Disc diameter M 2.5 - 3.5
Speed of rotation rev / min 0.5 - 1.0
Maximum peripheral velocity m/s 0.3
Depth of disc submergence % 40 - 90
Refer also to Table D.3 for duty standby requirements and relevant clause of
MS 1228 for more details.
Figure 5.13 – Rotating Biological Contactor (RBC) Systems
Rotating Biological
Contactor
Screens, Grit Removal, Fine Screen Flow

Flow M easurement D istribution
Final C larifier
Effluent To
Raw River
Sewage Balancing
Inlet Tank
Sewage
Pumping
Station
Liquor
Chemical
Dosing
Sludge Storage Area M echanical

Sludge Dewatering
M echanical
Sludge Thickener
Sludge Holding Tank

Ultimate Disposal
SludgeDrying Bed
OPTIONAL

Industry Guidelines
5.8.5 Trickling Filter
The trickling filter is an established biological treatment process removing

65 to 85% BOD5 and suspended solids. The process consists of a bed of
highly permeable medium. An overhead rotating distributor applies sewage
to the media. The flow trickles over and flows downward to the underdrain
system.
The media provides a large surface area to develop biological slime growth
which is also known as zoogleal film. The film contains living organisms
that break down organic material in the sewage.
Many variations of the trickling filters have been constructed, however the
recommended designs are given in Table 5.15.
5.8.5.1 Design Requirements for Trickling Filters
Secondary screens (< 6mm) and flow balancing tanks to equalise the flow
must be provided before trickling filters.
Provisions shall be available for even distribution to achieve complete

wetting of the filter media.
Figure 5.14 – Trickling Filter Systems
Biofilter
Fine
Pump Flow
Screen
Station Distribution
Screens, Grit Removal
Final Clarifier
Filter Effluent
Raw To River
Sewage
Inlet
Sewage
Pump Station
Liquor
Chemical
Dosing
Sludge Storage Area Mechanical Sludge

Dewatering
Mechanical Sludge
Thickener
Sludge Holding Tank

Ultimate Disposal
Sludge Drying Bed
OPTIONAL

Table 5.15 Design Parameters for Trickling Filter

Organic loading kg BOD5/day/m3
(depending on filter type)
Low rate 0.08 - 0.15
Intermediate rate 0.15 - 0.5
High rate 0.5 - 2.0
Recirculation of flow to head of
plant
> 1.0
Q recycle
Q inflow
(to maintain wetting rate and
improve flow)
Acceptable media HDPE, PVC, stone,
slag, coke, etc.
(random or standard
arrangement)
Hydraulic loading m3/day/m2
Low rate 1-4
Intermediate rate 4 - 10
High rate 10 - 40
Sludge Yields kg sludge / kg
Low-rate filters BOD5 influent 0.5
Intermediate filters 0.6 - 0.8
High-rate filters 1.0
Minimum depth of media m 1.5
Refer also to Table D.4 for duty standby requirements and relevant clause
MS 1228 for more details.
5.8.6 Sequencing Batch Reactors (SBR) System
Sequencing Batch Reactors System is suspended activated sludge system.

In this system, sewage flows into one or more reactors where biological
oxidation and clarification of sewage take place within the same reactors
sequentially on cyclical mode. There are five (5) basic sequences in a cycle,
namely:

Industry Guidelines
1. Fill
2. React (Aeration)
3. Settle
4. Decant
5. Idle
Typically, all actions in the reactor occur at different sequence of time. In

other words, the system is intermittently fill and intermittently decant.
Typical SBR plant consists of a minimum of two (2) reactors in a plant.
When one unit of the reactors is in fill mode, the other reactor(s) may be in
the stage of react, settle, decant or idle. Recent development of SBR system
leads to the emergence of variation in the operating sequences. Continuous
fill and intermittently decant system is one of the variations of this system,
where feeding into all rectors are continuous but the other phases (react,
settle, decant, idle) are run in sequence.
In the reaction stage, oxygen supplied to the system shall be in accordance

to the load to the system within the time frame of reaction cycle. This
generally requires higher oxygen capacity per unit time than a continuously
aerate system.
In the decant stage, there shall be sufficient time to allow for mixed liquor
suspended solids (MLSS) to settle before effluent decanting begins.
Decanting time is normally much shorter than fill time. Consequently, the
effluent flow rate will also be much higher than influent flow rate. Hence
the design of the decanting weir must be capable to handle high over-flow
rate without scouring the settled sludge. Therefore, sufficient clear water
depth between the minimum water level after decant and the top of the
settled sludge blanket must be allowed for to minimise sludge carry over.
Hence the depth of water decanted must be restricted to prevent scouring of
solids.
5.8.6.2 Design Requirements for SBR Plants
All SBR plants must be designed to cater for peak flows. A minimum of a
two (2) tanks system is required. Proven control system in the form of
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) with complete instruction, and
operational and training manuals must be submitted together with the
design. All SBR systems must be preceded with complete preliminary
works. Allowance shall be provided to completely empty a tank for
maintenance purposes without interrupting the operating sequence of the
plant.
Table 5.16 highlights the key design requirements for an SBR plant.

Table 5.16 Design Requirements for SBR System

Continuous Fill Intermittently Fill
Parameter Unit and Intermittently and Intermittently
Decant Decant
No. of Reactors Unit Minimum 2 minimum 2
Hydraulic retention hr 18 – 24 18 – 24
time at Qavg (at
average water level)
F/M Ratio d-1 0.05 – 0.08 0.05 – 0.30
Sludge Age D 20 – 30 10 – 30
Sludge Yield Kg Sludge 0.75 – 0.85 0.75 – 1.10
Kg BOD5 load
MLSS (End of Decant) mg/L 3,000 – 4,500 3,000 – 4,500
Cycle Time Hr 4–8 4–8

DO (Reactor) mg/L 0 ~ 6.5 0 ~ 6.5
DO (Effluent) mg/L 2.0 2.0
Oxygen Requirement Kg O2 Cycle Time
x
2.0 Kg O2 Cycle Time
x
2.0 Kg O2
Kg Substrate Aeration Time Kg substrate Aeration Time Kg Substrate
Decant Time Hr ≥ 1.0 ≥ 1.0

Decant Depth m Max 0.5 max 1.0
Decant Volume % Not more than 25% of Not more than 30% of
volume of Biological volume of Biological
Reactor at TWL Reactor at TWL
Decanting Device m3/m/hr ≤ 20 for decant draw- ≤ 20 for decant draw-
Loading Rate* down from TWL down from TWL
Minimum number of 2 nos. independent 2 nos. independent
decanter decanter per tank decanter per tank
Max. decanter length m 4.0 4.0
WAS Kg Sludge/d WAS=
TotalSolidsin System
WAS=
TotalSolidsin System
SludgeAge SludgeAge
Fill Volume m3 Vfill = (QP m3/hr x Vfill = (QP m3/hr x

1.5hr) + (Tfill –1.5) x 1.5hr) + (Tfill –1.5) x
QAVG (if no EQ) QAVG (if no EQ)
Vfill = QAVG x Tfill (if Vfill = QAVG x Tfill (if
preceded by EQ) preceded by EQ)
a. For continuous fill, length to width ratio shall be based on 3 : 1

b. RAS maybe necessary where length to width ratio poses dilution affect
into the inlet.
c. Decant Device Loading Rate shall be based on Vfill/decant Time during
decanting.

Industry Guidelines
5.8.7 Design Requirements for Hybrid Systems
A hybrid system is a recent development in biological treatment combining

suspended solids and fixed film growth processes. The treatment system
may be considered if the design criterion to be adopted has proven
performance and result.
5.8.8 Design for Nutrient Removal for Sensitive Receiving Water
Nutrient removal is required for effluent discharge to lakes and stagnant

water bodies to prevent eutrophication or other potential impacts that may
impede the sensitivity of the receiving water. Nutrient removal can be
achieved via:-
a) Biological treatment
b) Physical treatment
c) Chemical treatment
It has been emphasised in the beginning of this chapter, all biological

treatment system shall be designed to achieve ammonia reduction and where
necessary anoxic zone/stage to be added to encourage denitrification for
total nitrogen removal.
The biological Phosphorus removal mechanism is based on the fact that

bacteria are capable of storing excess Phosphorus as polyphosphate and
removing simple fermentation substrates produced in the anaerobic zone and
assimilating them into storage products within their cells. Hence, the design
for of the biological treatment shall follow the following for plants where
nutrient removal (nitrogen and phosphorus) is required, design parameters:-
Table 5.17 Design Requirement for Biological

Nutrient Removal System
Design HRT MLSS

Item Internal recycle
Parameters (hrs) (mg/l)
1 1st stage anaerobic 1-2 2,000 – 6,000 RAS from clarifier
2 1st stage anoxic 2-4 2,000 – 6,000 2 to 1 (MLSS
recirculation ratio)
3 1st stage aerobic 8 - 12 2,000 – 6,000 3 to 2 (MLSS
(oxic) recirculation ratio)
4 2nd stage anoxic 2-4 2,000 – 6,000 Mixing
5 2nd stage anaerobic 1-2 2,000 – 6,000 Mixing
6 2nd stage aerobic 4 2,000 – 6,000 -
(oxic)

It has been emphasised in the beginning of this chapter, all biological

treatment system shall be designed to achieve ammonia reduction and where
necessary anoxic zone/stage to be added to encourage denitrification for
total nitrogen removal.
Figure 5.15 - Typical Process Flow Diagram

for Biological Nutrient Removal System
To get To get
Phosphate Nitrate back
Back
Q 1st. 1st. 1st. 2nd 2nd. 2nd. Clarifier Effluent

Anaerobic Anoxic Aerobic Anoxic Anaerobic Aerobic
RAS
Alternatively, both physical and chemical treatment may be used to remove

Phosphorus in wastewater.
The designer shall take all necessary consideration in the design in relation
to the specific requirements of the receiving water in determining the actual
nutrient removal requirement on the case by case basis.

Industry Guidelines
5.9 Design of Secondary Clarifiers
5.9.1 Purpose
Effluent from biological processes contains large populations of micro-

organisms (MLSS). Secondary clarifiers provided after the biological
system allow the mixed liquor organisms / solid to settle. Clear supernatant
is discharged as the effluent, while some of the settled micro-organisms are
returned to the biological treatment system to maintain the MLSS
concentration and excess micro-organisms are removed as bio-solid to the
sludge treatment facility.
The design requirements shall include:
(I) General
a) Minimum retention time for settlement

b) Maximum settling velocity for settlement
c) Sludge hopper to collect settled sludge
d) All clarifiers must be equipped with sludge scrapers to skim sludge
from the bottom unless they are designed with a 60o hopper bottom
e) All clarifiers must be equipped with scum skimmer to remove
scum from the surface. The scum collected must be drained (where
necessary) and disposed-off. Returning the scum to the preliminary
system or the biological system is not permitted
f) Multiple hopper are not permitted.
g) Stilling basin to prevent hydraulic shock circuiting.
h) Bottom slope at clarifier floor
i) Facilities to dispose scum and sludge
j) Appropriate feed and outlet pipe with hydraulic consideration
k) Effluent collection channel to be of glazed finish/tiles
l) Proper maintenance access to all components.
m) Properly designed air lift pumps are only permitted for PE less than
1,000.
(II) Weirs
a) If insufficient length is available, then considerations shall be

given for the use of double weir.

b) Cascading V-notch is preferred over rectangular weirs.

c) Slots in the weir shall be provided to allow for level adjustment
during the installation stage.
d) Broad crested weirs are not encouraged
e) All parts of the weirs must be visible and accessible for regular
cleaning.
f) Type of weir and the hydraulic calculation for the weir proposed
must be submitted.
(III) Circular clarifiers
a) The maximum diameter permissible is 50 m and a reasonable

allowance between tanks shall be provided for vehicle access.
b) The minimum side water depth shall be 3.0 m. Greater side water
depths may be used if it can be shown that the mixed liquor is well
denitrified in the aeration tank.
c) Flow distribution channel/chamber shall be provided for flow
isolation or equalise flow distribution.
d) The scraper tip travelling speed shall not exceed 0.03 rpm. A
multiple stage reduction unit must be incorporated to achieve such
speed.
(IV) Rectangular clarifiers

a) Shall not be wider than 6 m per tank to allow for scraper removal,
unless other approved scraper units are available
b) Multi-port wall and baffled inlet shall be provided
c) Slide gates shall be used to isolate each tank
d) Allowance also shall be provided for vehicle movement between
unit processes for maintenance purposes
e) Scraper travelling speed shall be between 0.3 – 0.6 m/min.
Refer also to relevant clause of MS 1228 for more details.
5.9.3 Multiple Hoppers
Multiple hoppers are not accepted. This is due to the settling characteristics
of the particles in the flow. Larger and heavier particles settle faster than
smaller and lighter particles, creating difference in the distribution of
sedimentation in different hoppers. This will present operational difficulties
because sludge removal from the hoppers is unequal. To avoid the non-
uniform withdrawal of sludge, each hopper in the multiple hopper
configuration needs a separate pipe and pump or valve on each outlet.

Industry Guidelines
Table 5.18 Design Parameters for Secondary Clarifiers

Design Criteria
Description Unit
PE ≤ 5,000 PE > 5,000
Minimum number of tanks 2* 2
Tank configuration Square Circular
Circular #
Rectangula Rectangular
r
Minimum side water depth m 3** 3
Minimum hydraulic retention Hrs 2 2
time (HRT) at Qpeak
Surface overflow rate at Qpeak m3/d/m2 ≤30 ≤30
Solids loading rate at Qpeak kg/d/m2 <150 <150
Solids loading rate at Qavg kg/d/m2 <50 <50
Weir loading rate at Qpeak m3/day/m <180 <180
Return activated sludge (RAS) Continuou
Continuous
pumping rate s
Waste activated sludge (WAS) Continuou Continuous
pumping rate s or batch or batch
Sizing of rectangular tanks
Length : Width 3:1 or greater.
Maximum side water depth m 3.0
Width : Depth 1 : 1 to 2.5 : 1
Sizing of circular tanks
Side water depth, minimum m 3.0 **
Floor slope wall 1:12
Notes:
** For square clarifier with 600 slope minimum 1 m side water depth shall
be provided
* For PE less than or equal to 1,000 a single clarifier is acceptable.
#
Rectangular tanks are acceptable if equipped with automatic scraping
and desludging devices.

5.10 Disinfection
Disinfection refers to the selective destruction of disease causing organisms
in sewage effluent.
Methods of disinfection can be physical, chemical or radiation.
Continuous disinfection is required for those areas where the discharge from
the sewage works will cause detrimental effect onto the receiving water
course, such as bathing beaches, lakes, etc.
The Commission reserves the right to determine the need for the provision
of a continuous disinfection facility
The common forms of disinfection that are available for wastewater

applications are:
a. Chlorination
b. Ultra-Violet
c. Others
Chlorination is by far the most common type of disinfection used world-

wide. This is due to its effectiveness in providing a good pathogen kill with
relative simplicity in operation and maintenance. However, chlorination
using chlorine gas, requires a higher degree of operational skills and poses
potential health and safety hazards in the shipping and handling aspects.
Therefore, to reduce these hazards, only liquid or solid hypochlorite (sodium
or calcium) shall be used.
Ultra Violet disinfection differs from chemical disinfection in that it uses

irradiation to induce photobiochemical changes within the micro-organisms.
To ensure effective photochemical reaction taking place, one of the
conditions is that such radiation must be absorbed by the target molecule
(organism). The other condition is that sufficient radiation energy to alter
chemical bonds is made available. Given the conditions above, it is critical
that the effluent prior to disinfection must be relatively clear of suspended
solids. As such, for UV disinfection to be highly effective in wastewater
applications, filtration of upstream of the UV unit must be made available.
Other forms of wastewater disinfection that are available are maturation

ponds and ozonation. Maturation ponds have been used widely and
successfully in Malaysia. However, the drawback is that a relatively large
area of land is required to provide sufficient retention time in the pond for
the decay of pathogens. Ozone disinfection involves the direct ozone
oxidation or by reaction with the radical by-products of ozone
decomposition. However, due to ozonation’s relatively new status in
wastewater applications and higher costs at small scale facilities, its usage
for disinfection is still limited.

Industry Guidelines
All new STPs must have provision for disinfection infrastructure such as
contact tank and other necessary structures. The provision of the
disinfection facilities and equipment shall be in accordance to Table 5.19
below. The disinfection shall be carried out in continuous or intermittent
mode.
Table 5.19: Requirements for Disinfection Facility
Description Continuous Intermittent

Class of STP* Class 4 Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Type of Disinfection Chlorination Chlorination
Ultra-Violet (UV)
Ozone
Facility (1Duty/1Standby) for Basic facility
equipment structure.
* The Commission may impose separate requirements on case by case basis.
Figure 5.16 – Schematic illustration of ultraviolet disinfection system with

stilling plate for flow conditioning and elongated weir for level control
"A"
"A"
FLOW
PDC
COVER PLATES OR GRATING STAINLESS STEEL WEIR
TOP VIEW
(Cables removed for Clarity)
CONTROL PANEL AND

POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTRE
FRONT ACCESS
ULTRAVIOLET LAMP RACKS
COVER PLATES OR GRATING
STILING PLATES
LEVEL PROBE
FLOW
SECTION 'A' - 'A'

Figure 5.17 – Profile schematic of lamp modules relative to inlet and outlet
structure
Flapper Gate Disinfection Module

Level Control Power & Data UV Protective
Interconnect Cables
Flow
Effluent Inffluent
Channel Channel
Flow
A A
Service
Area
Electrically Operated Power Distribution

Station Cleaning Jib Host Data center (PDDC)
Liner with covet
304 Stainless Steel
Station Cleaning drain
Power Cable
Signal Cable
from Plant Flow meter
PLAN VIEW
Influent
Channel
Influent
Channel
SECTION "A - A"
Figure 5.18 Chemical-feed system schematic
CALIBRATION COLUMN
RELIEF VALVE
BACK PRESSURE
CHEMICAL CONTROL
FEED PUMP
STORAGE TANK

Industry Guidelines
5.10.1.1 Continuous Disinfection
A Disinfection with Ultra-Violet (UV)
a) Filtration ahead of the ultra-violet disinfection is a must to ensure

consistent and reliable disinfecting performance, as well as, to
reduce maintenance, such as, fouling of the UV lamps.
b) The performance of the UV unit shall meet a UV transmittance level
of secondary effluent of at least 60% on a filtered basis. If a lower
transmittance level is encountered, it shall be compensated with the
reduction in the spacing of lamps and/or usage of an advanced higher
intensity system to compensate the lower tranmissibility of the
sewage effluent.
c) The channel for the UV shall be open, long and narrow to encourage
plug flow and avoid short circuiting.
d) As a guide, the average sizing is roughly 10.0 conventional 1.5
meter lamps per 1,000 m3/day at peak flow. However, the actual
sizing shall be site specific and subjected to effluent quality desired
as well as the level of upstream treatment provided.
e) In the design to house the UV modules, it is important to include
proper inlet and outlet structures and consider the approach and exit
flow conditions.
f) A stilling well is required to distribute the flows and equalise the
velocities across the cross-section of the channel. The stilling plate
shall be placed at least 5 meters in front of the first lamp bank.
Otherwise, the channel should have an undisturbed straight line of
two (2) or three (3) lamps length.
g) Sufficient distance shall be allowed between lamp banks (0.5 m to 1.0
m) and two (2) to three (3) lamp lengths between the last bank and the
downstream level control device.
h) In large systems applications, a multichannel configuration is
required. This is to allow the inlet structure to satisfy the dual
requirements of inducing flow and to allow even distribution of flow
among operational channels. Channel inlet structures shall allow for
hydraulic isolation of individual channels during low flow and
routine maintenance. In operation, the multichannel design shall be
controlled to maintain a minimum velocity through any one channel.
i) Wastewater within the channel must be maintained at a constant
level with little fluctuations. This shall be accomplished by using a
mechanical counter balance gate downstream of the lamp batteries.
j) It is crucial to avoid a dryness state in the channel during low or no
flow conditions to prevent the fouling of the quartz jackets
surrounding the lamps and/or causing damage to the UV modules.
To alleviate this, for a small STP, a fixed or adjustable weir should
be used.

However, sufficient weir length shall be provided to avoid water

level fluctuations. In larger STPs using the multichannel design,
these flow fluctuations can be attenuated by the opening and closing
of channels as needed.
k) Control systems should be simple. Its objective is to ensure that the
system loading can be maintained and disinfection accomplished,
while conserving the operating life of the lamps. In small STPs, the
control system shall consists, of a full duty unit in operation at all
times with a similar redundant unit on standby. Manual control and
flexibility should be made available to enable the operator to bring
portions of the systems in and out of operation, as needed, to adjust
for the changes in flow or water quality. In larger STPs, a complete
automation is warranted for plants using the multi-channel design.
l) Safety aspects of an UV disinfection facility involve mainly the
electrical hazards and protection from the exposure to UV radiation.
The exposure risks could be minimised as long as the operating
lamps are submerged and the lamp batteries are shielded. The UV
lamps shall not be operated in air and unshielded. All systems must
be equipped with safety interlocks that shut down the modules if
they are moved out of their operating positions or the wastewater
level falls, leaving any or all lamps exposed to air. Electrical
hazards can be minimised by the inclusion of ground-fault-
interruption circuitry with each module. This feature is a
requirement for all UV systems.
m) The design of the UV system shall allow for easy access to the lamp
modules for cleaning and other maintenance tasks. The installation
shall have adequate working area for maintenance and servicing of
the modules when taken out of the channels. Cleaning of the lamps
shall be accomplished using mechanical wipers which may be fitted
with chemical injectors and with chemical baths when taken out of
the channels.
n) A drainage system back to the head of the treatment works shall be
provided to drain back water from the reactors, channels and other
related tankage. In addition, a permanent clean-water system is to
be made available to allow for rinsing and cleaning needs. A bypass
around the UV disinfection facility is to be made available in the
event the system is shut down completely for maintenance.

Industry Guidelines
Table 5.20 - Design Guides for Disinfection with Ultra-Violet(UV)
Description Design Criteria

UV system Mounted in open channel type*
Must be preceeded with filtration.
Minimum UV Dose (at 254 nm) at end of 30 mJ/cm2 (30,000 µWs/cm2)

lamp life at Qpeak
Maximum Total Suspended Solids in < 10 mg/l

effluent to UV system
Maximum Mean Particle Size in effluent 20 microns
UV Transmittance at 254 nm 65%
Lamp life ≥12,000 hours
Minimum UV output at end of lamp life 80%
Operating Temperature 18 – 40 oC
Relative Humidity >95% at 40 oC
UV detection System UV sensor, transmittance, dose pacing
Lamp Sleeve Cleaning system 1. Mechanical wipers and out of channel

chemical cleaning.
2. Additional 25% more lamps shall be

provided for mechanical wipers .
Standby lamps 25% to be provided with min 2 lamp

banks
Disinfection Standards In accordance with receiving water

requirement or effluent usage
Note:
*Enclosed system shall be permitted under special circumstances
B Disinfection with Hypochlorite
a) Calcium and sodium hypochlorite are hazardous chemicals to handle

and use. Calcium hypochlorite is classified as a corrosive and rapid
oxidant, while sodium hypochlorite is a corrosive agent. Eye
protection, access to an emergency eyewash system and showers
must be made available to the operators. Also, direct contact with

the undiluted hypochlorite is likely to cause burns to the skin and

clothing. Therefore, it is imperative that protective clothing which
includes rubber gloves, must be worn by operators when working
with these chemicals. When calcium hypochlorite is being
transported in the powder form and mixed in water to form
solutions, the operator should always wear eye protection and dust
masks. All areas exposed to hypochlorite should be washed
thoroughly.
b) Chlorine dosage ranges from 6 to 10 mg/l for effluent. The dosage
rate is affected by the suspended solids and ammonia present in the
effluent, mixing employed, contact time and the control strategies
used for dosing.
c) Proper mixing is important for effective disinfection
d) If a hydraulic jump is employed as a mixing device, the
submergence of the diffuser shall not be less than 230 mm (9 in)
below the water surface and placed before the hydraulic jump at the
minimum flow. The hydraulic jump is effective in mixing when the
head loss exceeds 0.6 m (2 ft). To ensure adequate mixing is
achieved, the evaluation of the flow characteristics should be carried
out. As a minimum, the Reynolds number shall be 2.1 x 104 for pipe
flow and Froude numbers between 4.5 and 9 for open channels is
recommended.
e) Hypochlorinators are chemical-feed pumps used for feeding sodium
or calcium hypochlorite. The basic components are a storage
reservoir or mixing tank for the hypochlorite solution; a metering
pump that consists of a positive displacement pumping mechanism,
motor or solenoid, and a feed rate adjustment device; and an injection
device. Depending on the size of the system, a plastic or fiber-glass
vessel may be used to hold a low-strength hypochlorite solution. It is
not acceptable to use metals commonly used in the construction of
storage tanks to hold the hypochlorite solutions because of the
corrosive nature of the chemical which will also expedite the
decomposition of the liquid hypochlorite.
f) Feeding of calcium hypochlorite will require a mixing device,
usually a motorised propeller or agitator located in the tank. Also, in
the tank is a foot-valve and suction strainer connected to the suction
inlet of the hypochlorinator.
g) The hypochlorinator shall be feed rate adjustable.
h) The injection fitting shall be similar to that used in the gas
chlorinator.
i) A chlorine contact tank shall take the form of rectangular serpentine
chamber. Circular chambers for disinfection are not acceptable.
j) Local supply of water shall be made available for the dilution of
powder calcium or sodium hypochlorite. A breaker tank for supply
of water is required for the proper running of the hypochlorinator. If

Industry Guidelines
deemed necessary, the water pressure may be increased with the

provision of water booster pump.
k) Pipe works should be suitable for chlorination applications andwell
supported
l) Provision for draining the chlorine contact chamber is required for
cleaning and maintenance purposes. This shall include a drain valve
located at the bottom of the downstream end of the chamber. The
point of discharge shall ensure that adequate treatment is given and
this could be done through pumping the content from the chamber
and return to the head of the treatment plant.
m) A bypass around the chlorine contact chamber shall also be provided
to enable flows to be bypassed during maintenance or servicing.
There shall be penstocks upstream and downstream of the chlorine
contact chamber for isolation purposes.
n) Adequate access with sufficient turning radius for the vehicle to
carry in the chemicals to the disinfection system shall be provided.
o) A small housing structure shall be provided to house
hypochlorinator, associated chemicals and ancillaries. Some
important consideration have to be given in the design of adequate
space for the operators to replace and fill the chemicals, washing
facility, eyewash, record keeping of chemical dosing, effluent
flowmeter data among others. Due to the hazardous nature of the
disinfection system housed, a locking system shall be made
available to deter vandalism and promote safety of the plant.
The structure housing the hypochlorinator and the chemicals shall be

bunded to prevent the possibility of spillage. The sizing of bunds shall
correspond to the total volume of the storage/solution tanks.

Table 5.21 – Design Guide for Disinfection with Hypochlorite
Type Calcium or Sodium

Dosage 6 – 10 mg/l
Mixing Mechanical, baffles or hydraulic jump.
Hypochlorinator Feed rate adjustable
system
Equipment 1Duty / 1Standby
Contact Tank
Contact Period 15 minutes at Qp
Maximum depth 3m
Depth : Width 2:1
Min no. of passes 4
Length : Width at 6:1
each pass
Wetted Depth : < 2:1
Width
5.10.1.2 Intermittent Disinfection
The design requirements for intermittent disinfection facility shall comply to

the following:
a) Due to the infrequent usage and other health and safety

considerations in an intermittent disinfection system, ONLY liquid
hypochlorite, either calcium or sodium, shall be used.
b) A chlorine contact chamber shall be provided with a minimum of 15
minute hydraulic retention time at peakflow. This chamber shall be
of a rectangular configuration with aspect ratios optimised to
promote plug flow conditions. The recommended aspect ratios are
as follows:
i) Length to width (each “Pass”): 6:1
ii) Minimum number of passes: 4
iii) Height to width of the cross-section of the wetted section: <
2:1
iv) Depth of chlorine contact chamber is typically 2 – 3 m. The
corners shall be rounded to reduce the dead flow areas and
the velocity through the contact chamber shall be sufficient
to minimise solids deposition.

Industry Guidelines
v) horizontal baffles shall be used to ensure the plug flow

conditions are maintained and to minimise the possibility of
short circuiting.
vi) Upstream of the contact chamber, a dosing coupling for easy

hook-up of the mobile hypochlorite disinfection system shall
be an inherent part of the chamber design.
c) A breaker tank for supply of water adjacent to the contact tank is

required to provide water for the mixing of powder hypochlorite and
for cleaning or cleansing of the contact chamber. If deemed
necessary, a water booster system shall be provided to increase the
water pressure for the intended application.
d) Draining provision must be made available to allow for complete
drainage of the chlorine contact tank. For this purpose, a drain valve
shall be provided at the bottom of the downstream end of the
chamber.
e) Penstock/slide gate shall be provided at the upstream and
downstream end of the contact chamber. This allows for the effluent
flow from the treatment plant to bypass this chamber when its
service is not required.
f) Adequate access shall be provided for a portable hypochlorinator
unit mounted on a skid to be brought by a truck to the contact
chamber area when disinfection is required. A concrete pad adjacent
to the contact chamber shall be provided for the skid mounted
hypochlorinator to be situated when in use.
g) Power supply shall be adequately provided and located close to the
contact chamber to run the intermittent disinfection system.
Table 5.22 - Design Guide for Intermittent Disinfection

Dosage 6 – 10 mg/l
Mixing Mechanical, baffles or hydraulic jump.
Hypochlorinator system Feed rate adjustable
Equipment 1Duty / 1Standby

Table 5.22 - Design Guide for Intermittent Disinfection (cont.)

Contact Tank
Contact Period 15 minutes at Qp
Maximum depth 3m
Depth : Width 2:1
Min no. of passes 4
Length : Width at each pass 6:1
Wetted Depth : Width < 2:1
5.11 Design of Flow Measurement Devices
5.11.1 Purpose of Flow Measuring Devices
Flow measuring devices are necessary for monitoring of plant operation and
process control continuously. The purposes of flow devices are:
a) to maintain flow records periodically for future reference, especially

when plant expansion is needed
b) to identify the flow pattern which may be due to population growth
or infiltration
c) Statutory requirement by the DOE to maintain flow records at all
sewage works.
d) To establish operational cost for treatment of sewage
5.11.2 Design Requirements for Flow Devices
Flow devices are mandatory for all sewage treatment plants, regardless of
size.

Industry Guidelines
Table 5.23 Design Parameters for Flow Devices
Design Criteria
Description
PE ≤ 5,000 PE > 5,000
Location of flow Inlet or Outlet Inlet and Outlet
meter
Type of Flow Closed Conduit or Open Closed Conduit or Open
Measurement Channel Channel
Type of flow V- notch (Outlet Only) V-notch (Outlet Only)
meter Rectangular Weir (Outlet Only) Rectangular (Outlet Only)
Flumes Flumes
Electromagnetic Electromagnetic
Ultrasonic Ultrasonic
Method of Automated or manual Automated devices linked to
measurement measurement of Staff gauge to data logging with integrator
measure height of crest with and transmitted to chart
calibration curves / tables recorder
(minimum 7 days chart time)
Measurement Continuous or Intermittent Continuous
times
5.12 Sludge Holding, Treatment and Disposal
5.12.1 Introduction
All treatment processes are capable of producing significant quantities of

sludge which requires to be further treated. The sludge comprises essentially
inert and organic matters that are biodegradable and non-biodegradable
present in sewage, and bacterial cells generated by the biological treatment
processes. The treated sludge, often referred as bio-solids is ready for safe
disposal or reuse.
The importance of sludge management increases with the increase in the

amount of sewage treated. Space has to be allowed within the premises of an
STP to accommodate sludge treatment, handling and storage facilities.
All sludge need to be treated for safe disposal back to the environment. The
minimum requirement for sludge treatment is to achieve stabilize sludge
with a 20% dry solid content.

For large scale development whereby the full sludge generation will only be
achieved over a certain time period, proper sizing/modulation of sludge
treatment facilities need to be provided in order to achieve the immediate
needs for sludge treatment.
5.12.2 Sludge Strategy in General
Figure 5.20 shows the typical sludge treatment and disposal strategy which
consists of three main stages.
i) Stage 1 - Preliminary treatment and digestion

ii) Stage 2 - Conditioning and dewatering
iii) Stage 3 - Utilisation and disposal
(I) Stage 1 - Preliminary Treatmentand Digestion
Preliminary treatment may include reception or holding facility for screened

sludge , primary thickening and digestion facilities.
For imported sludge the reception facility may comprise of an unloading

area, screen chamber, reception tank and transfer pump(s).
Thickening equipment, such as, centrifuge, drum thickener or gravity belt

thickener is provided to thicken the raw screened sludge from about 1% dry
solids content to about 6% dry solids content. To assist the thickening
process, an ‘in-line’ polymer dosing system or chemical conditioning shall
be provided.
Two types of digestion facilities are available for digestion after the
thickening: aerobic and anaerobic digestion.
Secondary thickening is recommended to reduce the volume of digested

sludge, which will then reduce the size, and the number of the next
treatment process unit, i.e., dewatering equipment.
(II) Stage 2 - Conditioning and Dewatering
Dewatering can be achieved by two (2) methods : mechanical dewatering

and non-mechanical dewatering.
a) Mechanical dewatering such as belt filter press, centrifuge or filter

press is provided for sludge dewatering purposes. To assist the
mechanical dewatering equipment in achieving optimum level of
cake dryness, an ‘in-line’ polymer dosing system or chemical
conditioning shall be provided.
b) Non-mechanical dewatering, e.g. drying beds or sludge lagoons is

often used

Industry Guidelines
For a facility serving ≥ 10,000 PE, the drying beds must be

designed to support mechanical / machine lift for the purpose of
clearing the dried sludge.
Sludge lagoons of about 2 m depth are also used for sludge

stabilisation and drying. The sludge lagoons shall be sized to
receive sludge for a period of at least 6 months and are allowed to
undergo stabilisation through evaporation and drying for another 6
months period. The lagoons shall be lined with either PVC lining,
concrete or 600 mm thick clay lining. An access ramp shall be
provided to allow mechanical equipment access to clean dried
sludge.
(III) Stage 3 - Utilisation and Disposal
After the dewatering process, an on-site storage for 30 days of the treated
bio-solid shall be provided. The storage structure shall be covered with
roof and provided with partly opened walls to allow for proper ventilation.
Finally, the bio-solid is either composted and/or applied directly for land
reclamation (i.e., for ex-mining land), land application (i.e., for certain types
of agriculture land and forest land/reforestation) or used as top soil cover at
land fill site. The ultimate disposal of bio-solid is the responsibility of the
plant operator.
5.12.3 Provision of Sludge Holding, Treatment and Disposal
The Service Licensee will advise on current capacity in its existing sludge
treatment facilities, suitable sludge stabilisation, dewatering and final
disposal of the sludge shall be provided.
If the Service Licensee has the capacity to receive sludge generated from the
development, then the project proponent has the option to negotiate with the
Service Licensee to dispose off the sludge at the existing facility. In this
case, a sludge storage tank with a minimum capacity to hold for 30 days
with the sludge thickened to 1% solids is acceptable. Otherwise, the sludge
shall be stabilised, dewatered and prepared in a suitable form for disposal.
Different types of STPs produce different quantities of bio-solid. The

principal assumptions adopted on waste generation rates are summarised in
Table 5.24.

Table 5.24 – Sludge Generation Rates
Treatment System Unit Generation Rates Comments

Primary Sludge
Primary Clarifier 0.5 kg sludge/kg solids input Based on continuous
sludge withdrawal
Imhoff Tank 0.15 kg sludge/kg SS input Based on average 6 month
desludging period
Secondary Sludge
Conventional 0.8 to 1.0 kg sludge/kg BOD5 Standard A/B
Activated Sludge removed
System
Extended Aeration or 0.4 to 0.6 kg sludge/kg BOD5 Standard A/B
Oxidation Ditch removed
RBC/SBC/High Rate 0.8* kg sludge/kg BOD5 Standard A/B
Trickling Filter removed
System
Hybrid System 0.4 kg sludge/kg BOD5 Standard A/B
removed
Note:
Based on the above assumptions, the quantity of waste sludge requiring treatment and disposal can be
estimated. Refer also to design guides related to each of the above individual processes.
5.12.4 Design Criteria
The ultimate aim of sludge treatment is to achieve at a minimum stabilised

sludge with dry solids content of 20% for final disposal. A combination of
various unit processes may be used to achieve this minimum requirement.
(I) Sludge Reception / Sludge Holding
a) An unloading area is normally provided to receive sludge tankers

delivering imported sludge to the facility, if necessary. It should
also includes a parking area for sludge tankers.
b) A mechanically raked screen with 12 mm opening together with a
manually raked by-pass screen shall be provided where necessary.
c) Connection fitted female coupling with ball valve shall be provided
at the reception facility for the connection of desludging tanker’s
hose.

Industry Guidelines
d) Minimum three (3) days sludge holding capacity of between 1 to

4% dry solids content sludge (depending on the types of sludge)
shall be provided after the screening process.
e) Overflow pipe shall be provided at sludge holding tank to aeration
tank to avoid overflowing.
f) Adequate ventilation/air extraction fan shall be provided at the
thickening / dewatering house.
(II) Solid Thickening
Thickening is a process used to increase the solids content of sludge by

removing a portion of the liquid fraction. It is generally accomplished by
physical means, including co-settling, gravity settling, flotation,
centrifugation, gravity belt and rotary drum. The design parameters for
sludge thickening equipment shall follow Table 5.25 below:
Table 5.25 Design Parameters for Sludge Thickening
Speed of
Backwash
% Dry Polymer Sludge
Type of Thickening water
Solids System feed
system
pump
Picket Fence Gravity
1.5
Thickener
n/a n/a n/a
Dissolved Air
2
Flotation
Belt Thickener 4 Yes with
Drum Thickener 4 appropriate
Centrifuge polymer
< 300 rpm Yes
turndown
4
ratio
Note:
a. Mechanical thickener shall be designed for 8hrs/day and 5d/week operation.
b. For belt, drum and centrifuge thickener, three polymer injection points shall be
provided
c. Potable water to be provided for polymer mixing system.
(III) Solid Digestion
Sewage bio-solids in its natural state (raw) is rich in pathogenic organisms,

easily putrescible and rapidly developing unpleasant smells. Stabilization
processes were developed with the purpose of stabilizing the biodegradable
fraction of organic matter present in the bio-solids, thus reducing the risk of
putrefaction as well as diminishing the concentration of pathogens. The
stabilization processes can be divided into:

a) Biological stabilization – specific bacteria promote the stabilization

of the biodegradable fraction of the organic matter
b) Chemical stabilization – chemical oxidation of the organic matter
accomplishes sludge stabilization.
c) Thermal stabilization – heat stabilizes the volatile fraction of
sludge in hermetically sealed containers.
The most widely used stabilization process is biological stabilization via

anaerobic and aerobic digestion.
Table 5.26 Design Parameters for Aerobic

and Anaerobic Digestion
Design Criteria
Description Unit Aerobic Anaerobic
Digestion Digestion
Number of Tank, Minimum No. 2 2
Min. Solids Retention Time Days 10 18
Organic Loading Rate KgVS/m3.d 1.6 – 4.8 0.8 – 1.6
Typical Feed Solids % 2 2-6
Concentration
Type of Mixing Aerators Gas Injection
Diffusers Mechanical
Stirring
Mechanical
Pumping
Min. Water Depth, minimum m 3 7.5
Tank Shape Cylindrical Cylindrical
Rectangular Egg-Shaped
Tank Dimension, maximum m 25 diameter 25 diameter
25 length
Dissolved Oxygen mg/L 1-2 -

Industry Guidelines
(IV) Sludge Dewatering
Table 5.27 Recommended Design Parameters

for Sludge Stabilisation and Dewatering
Design Considerations
Descriptions Unit
PE ≤ 2,000 PE > 2,000
Sludge Stabilisation
Type of stabilisation Simple anaerobic or Ambient anaerobic
process aerobic digestion digestion with good mixing
facility
Hydraulic retention time Days 30 30
(HRT) minimum
Dewatering
Type of device Belt press Belt press
Centrifuge Centrifuge
Filter press Filter press
Drying bed Drying bed *
Minimum dry solids % 20 20
(content after
dewatering)
Operating period of 5 days/week # 5 days/week #
mechanical thickening 8 hours/day 8 hours/day
and dewatering facility 250 days/year 250 days/year
Handling capacity of 4 weeks cycle on 4 weeks cycle on
drying bed 450 mm thick feed † 450 mm thick feed †
Covered storage area 1 month holding 1 month holding
Notes:
a. Access ramp of at least 1.5m wide shall be provided at all sludge drying beds
* Drying beds must be designed to support mechanical / machine lift for more
than 10,000 PE.
#
Design to be based on one full-time working shift only.
†
In computing the area requirements of a sludge drying bed, the designer may
assume a maximum 450 mm depth of sludge feed to the bed. The actual quantity
of sludge from the upstream unit processes needs to be computed before sizing
the bed. Each bed may be designed to handle a maximum of 7 days continuous
feed. The next feed to the same bed shall only be after a minimum of 21 days
from the last feed. A one-third (1/3) reduction in actual land area requirement
will be acceptable if fully covered drying beds are provided. Reduction shall only
apply to the total surface area of drying bed. No reduction is allowed for the
drying bed thickness.

Structures and materials used for the drying bed covers shall be designed to an
acceptable structural strength and of acceptable quality to withstand local weather
conditions.
Figure 5.20 – Sludge Treatment and Disposal Strategy
Untreated Sludge
Screening
Primary Thickening
Preliminary
Treatment
and Digestion
Anaerobic Digestion Aerobic Digestion (Optional)
Secondary Thickening Possible disposal

(Optional) of Liquid Sludge
Chemical Conditioning
Conditioning
and
Dewatering
Mechanical Dewatering Drying Beds Drying Lagoons
Storage at works
To inlet of STW
Utilisation
Composting or
and
on-site Liquor Treatment Plant
Disposal
Transportation from works
Land Application
Land Reclamation Landfill Site
Forestry/Agriculture

Industry Guidelines
(V) Ultimate Disposal
The treatment plant project proponent has to indicate in the proposal

the ultimate disposal options and actual volume for disposal
throughout the life time of the plant.
5.13 Tertiary Treatment
5.13.1 Introduction
Tertiary treatment is associated with the requirements to further reduce or

remove pollutants beyond the levels achieved by common secondary
treatment processes. Such requirements can be in the forms of the removal
of nutrients, such as, nitrogen and phosphorus; lower BOD5 or SS levels; or
trace elements of toxic constituents, such as, heavy metals or refractory
organics.
The various methods of tertiary treatment include simple maturation ponds,

adsorption, chemical treatment, and filtration; air stripping, mambrane or
reoxygenation.
Tertiary treatment is required before discharging to very sensitive receiving

waters. The Commission will specify the need for such treatment on a case-
by-case basis, depending upon the sensitivity of the project.
5.13.2 Design Requirement
(I) Filtration system

a) Filtration is the most common tertiary treatment system used to
remove suspended or colloidal matter in the effluent.
b) Backwashing shall be limited to once per day. The volume of
backwash water shall not exceed 10% of plant throughout.
Backwash water shall be stored in a buffer tank before being return
to the inlet of the plant.
c) Where used, the facility for dosing conditioners shall be provided at
the inlet of the filter system.
d) On-line turbidity meter, level detector and flow measurement shall
be utilized to measure filter performance.
e) If the filters are housed in a building, adequate and safe access shall
be provided for maintenance purposes.
f) The filters shall have automated backwash features and sized
adequately to allow continuous filtration.

g) For package plants, it is preferred to use FRP as the filter vessel.

However, fabricated steel is also acceptable provided that
protective coatings are included. For larger plants, the use of
reinforced concrete is encouraged.
(II) Adsorption (Activated Carbon)

a) Activated carbon is used to remove small quantities of refractory
organics, as well as inorganic compounds, such as nitrogen, sulficles
and heavy metals.
b) Adsorption shall be preceded by filtration using granular media to
ensure a consistant feed quality, which is affected by pH,
temperature and flow rate.
c) Uniform feedwater to avoid any surges that might adversely affect
the carbon adsorption.
d) Clarity of feedwater is important to avoid restriction of pores or
build up of materials within the pore structure.
e) Backwashing rate and the frequency required depend on the
hydraulic loading and operational method. Typical duration of
backwashing is 10-15 minutes.
(III) Chemical Treatment

a) Chemicals can be used as tertiary treatment for acid-base
neutralisation and precipitation of phosphorous.
b) Phosphorous precipitation requires the addition of coagulants, which
usually are lime, alum, sodium aluminate, ferric chloride and ferrous
sulfate.
c) Dosing systems and safety features to be provided to assure the
operation and maintenance of the systems can be carried out in a
safe and healthy environment.
(IV) Air Stripping

a) This method is used to remove ammonia nitrogen (NH4 – N) from
effluent.
b) The design features shall depend on the required level of nitrogen
removal with the critical parameters being tower packing, quantity
of air supply, air and liquid temperatures and process control
measures.

Industry Guidelines
(V) Reoxygenation
a) This method is used to increase the dissolved oxygen (DO) levels in
the effluent
b) The different types of reoxygenation systems are cascade,
reoxygenation and mechanical reoxygenation
c) Cascade reoxygenation is achieved using on the hydraulic design of
structures, such as, weir overflows, flumes, spillways, etc.
d) Mechanical reoxygenation is achieved using mechanical equipment
such as surface aerators, jet diffusers or diffused air (coarse, fine
bubble, etc.)
e) Design of structures or mechanical equipment is based on the
amount of DO required for the effluent.
(VI) Maturation ponds

a) Pond systems are normally not encouraged because it requires large
land area and the inherent difficulty in controlling algal growth. In
special cases, where land is in abundance, the project proponent may
choose to use this system.


Industry Guidelines
Section 6
Requirements for
Ancillary Facilities
Requirements for Ancillary Facilities
6.1 Introduction
This section defines the minimum requirements of ancillary facilities to be

provided at the sewage treatment plants. These requirements are crucial in
ensuring the workability and operability of the plants
6.2 Water Supply and Wash Water
Water shall be supplied to each site from standpipes and taps, to provide
for sanitary cleansing of plant areas, personal hygiene, safety, fire fighting,
process use and for equipment cooling and/or sealing. Water shall be
connected to potable supply that provides a minimum pressure of 20 m
head across the site. A ring main system shall be provided for all treatment
plants larger than 5000 PE.
Each sewage treatment plant or sludge treatment facility shall be provided

with water tank of at least 445 litre storage capacities or one day water
usage or whichever is higher
Double backflow prevention shall be provided in all cases. This is to prevent

contamination of any potable water service, including the incoming supply line.
The water supply system shall be sized to meet the following cases:
i) Fire fighting demand as instructed by the local regulations and any

essential plant water demands.
ii) All potentially simultaneous process uses, equipment uses and a for
plant cleansing.
All water supplies and its installation (piping, tanks, air conditioning
drainpipes, gutters and etc.) must be totally isolated from all potential
contact of electrical system by means of total enclosure or suitably located
the electrical system above flood level.
Where required, wash water shall be equipped with booster pump and
where possible, obtain from reclaimed water.
Drawings submitted for approval shall indicate locations of water tapping

point and piping layout. Approval for water tapping should be obtained
from water authority for permanent water supply before submitting
inspection form. All related document, such as water bills and transfer of
ownership, to be submitted before final inspection.
Table 6.1 tabulates the minimum number and location of stand pipe
required in a sewage treatment plant. Typical drawing of stand pipe are
shown in Figure 6.1

Table 6.1 – Minimum Number of Recommended Water

Stand Pipe and Location
Class of Population Minimum

Location
STP Equivalent Numbers
1 ≤1,000 1 Inlet Works
2 1,001 – 2 Inlet Works and Treatment Process Unit
5,000
3 5,001 – 2 Inlet Works and Treatment Process Unit
20,000
4 >20,000 4 Inlet Works, Secondary Screen Area,
Treatment Process Units and Dewatering
Facilities.
Figure 6.1 Standard Details for Stand Pipe
800
76 648 76
Ø15 G.I PIPE

608
76
8
64
100
80
76
STAND PIPE
6.3 Mess Facilities and Ablutions
All treatment plants shall have a minimum of one sanitary set consisting of
a toilet and wash basin. Washing facilities, toilets and showers shall be
provided for operators at all Class 3 and Class 4 plants with PE greater

Industry Guidelines
than 5,000. Additionally, mess accommodation shall be provided at Class

4 treatment plants with PE greater than 20,000.
Guard house with water and power supply shall also be provided for plant
more than 20,000 PE.
Figure 6.2 Typical for Administration and Mess Facilities

Building
16 Visitor’s / Staff Parking
Covered Porch
Manager’s /
2
Engineer’s Office
1 4
Reception Area General Office
3 Supervisor's Office
5
Meeting /
Briefing Room
12
14 Control Room
Workshop
8 Sample Reception
& Preparation
7 Male
Toilet
7 Female 9 9
Toilet Clean Locker Room Dirty Locker Room
Prayer Recreation Area
6
Room 10
Pantry
9
13 11 Toilet / Shower
General Store Eating Area
16 Motorcycles / Operational Vehicles Parking
Note : The numbers on the layout correspond to the numbers in Table B.1.
The layout is only for indicative purposes only and can be changed ( i.e. floor space and other arrangement)
to suit the plant’s needs and requirements.

Minimum internal floor area of mess facilities are 400 meter2. Approval
from the Commission shall be sought if smaller floor area is to be
provided. Typical arrangement of mess facilities is shown in Figure 6.2
6.4 Roads and Access

All-weather, surfaced roads shall be provided to permit access to all
treatment plants. The roads must withstand a load of at least 15 tonnes.
Such roads must also be constructed within the plant providing access to
each process unit. The construction shall comply with Public Work
Department requirement. Figure 6.3 and Figure 6.4 illustrate the typical
section of road pavement and site road.
Figure 6.3 Typical Details of Road Pavement

40 THK. WEARING COURSE
60 THK. PREMIX BINDER COURSE
10 THK. SAND/QUARRY DUST
300 THK. CRUSHER RUN

50 THK SAND
Figure 6.4 Typical Road Section of Site Road
4000
ROAD KERB ROAD KERB
FALL FALL
40 THK. WEARING COURSE ROLLED ASPHALT 55% 14 AGGREGATE

60 THK. DENSE BITUMIN MACADAM BINDER COURSE
100 THK. ROAD BASE, COATED MACADAM
1100 THK. SUB BASE GRANULAR D.TP. TYPE 1
POLYFELT TS 600 OR SIMILAR APPROVED BY ENGINEERS
The on-site road shall be able to provide safe and convenient access for
trucks or other machinery equipment used for maintenance purposes. The

Industry Guidelines
minimum width of the road shall be 4 m. Where vehicles need to pass

frequently or parking is required along the road, the minimum width shall
be 6 m.
Corner of junction for perimeter internal road for tankers or trucks access
shall have a minimum inside radius of 6 meter. Inside radius for perimeter
road not intended for tankers or trucks access shall be not less than 4
meter.
Cul-de-sac at the end of roads shall be provided with turning area reserve
of not less than 9 meter.
Where roads for maintenance vehicles or machineries are not required,

concrete or hard surfaced walkways of at least 900 mm width shall be
provided between each process unit. Concrete hardstanding area can be
laid where storage bins are located. The use of steps shall be avoided,
where possible.
Where the ingress or egress of the treatment plant is near a junction of a

public road, an adequate acceleration and deceleration lane must be made
available between the access road and the junction for vehicles to safely
enter and leave the treatment plant.
Vehicular access shall be provided to all unit processes that require daily
operation and maintenance.
6.5 Drainage
The area of the treatment plant shall be adequately drained and this shall
be arranged to prevent surface water run-off from entering the process
units.
Any cleaning or maintenance process wash water must be returned to the

inlet works via a separate drainage system.
External drainage facilities must be provided for treatment plant along the
slope area. Cut off drainage at the entrance must also be provided.
Treatment plant platform level shall be designed above flood level. If the
treatment plant is located in a flood prone area, flap gate shall be provided
to avoid back flow from the river/ main drain. The plant hydraulic must be
designed properly to ensure the discharge head is adequate to open the flap
valve at any circumstances.
The effluent discharge shall be directed to the main drain or river to avoid
discharging effluent into a drain within the residential area. Discharge to a
retention pond is not allowed unless prior approval has been granted.

The receiving drain/watercourse shall have sufficient capacity to accept the

run-off from the plant as well as the effluent discharge from the treatment
plant.
6.6 Fencing and Security
The boundary of a treatment plant, pumping station and/or sludge

treatment facility shall be secured by 3.0 meter high fence. The perimeter
fence shall have an entrance by double gates or sliding barrier to allow
access of maintenance vehicles. The gates shall be secured by padlocks
and shall comply with the requirements of the Commission. Where the
treatment plant is situated in a building, access to the plant must be
secured.
The fence shall be 2.4 meter solid wall with three strands of 0.6 meter high
barbed wire. Typical details of the fence are given in Figure 6.5, 6.6, 6.7
and 6.8.
STP project proponent is required to provide adequate warning/safety and

the Commission signboard before handing over the sewerage system to the
Commission.

Industry Guidelines
Figure 6.5 Typical Drawing of Brickwall Fencing and Gate
3 NOS. 2.5mm DIA.

BARRED WIRE
3 NOS. 2.5 DIA. 3000 4200 2100
BARRED WIRE
3 THK. M.S. PLATE
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X
600
X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
BRICKWALL FENCE BRICKWALL

FENCE
2400
900
150
225
6"x6" CONCRETE 63 x 63 x 6
COLUMN @ 3m THK. ANGLE
INTERNAL 225
600
SQ.
600 x 600 x 900 DEEP GRADE 20 MASS

CONCRETE STUMP
150 DIA. X 14.6 #M.S. POST
TYPICAL DRAWINGS OF BRICKWALL FENCING

Figure 6.6 Brickwall Fencing
3200 3200
2T12
230
800
800
2T12 2T12 A
2T12
R 6 -2 0 0 R 6-20 0
600
230 x 230m m R C C O LU M N
1 0 0 x 1 2 5 m m C O P IN G B E A M 1 0 0 x 1 2 5 m m C O P IN G B E A M A T 3 .2 m IN T E R V A L S 4T12
A
D U L U X G L O S S F IN IS H L IN K S R 6 -1 5 0
400
(P A N T O N E 3 0 0 C ) C C
O R E Q U IV A L E N T
2200
2200
D U L U X G L O S S F IN IS H 1 1 5 m m T H K B R IC K W A L L
400
(P A N T O N E 3 5 4 C ) P L A S T E R E D O N B O T H S ID E
O R E Q U IV A L E N T
D U L U X T U N G S T E N (1 0 4 1 2 )
O R E Q U IV A L E N T SURFACE TO BE ROUGHENED
300
2T12
2T12 2T12 B 2T12 F IN IS H E D G R D . L E V E L F IN IS H E D G R D . L E V E L
R 6 -1 5 0 R 6-15 0
MIN. 900
MIN. 900
B
300
2T12
230
2T12 115 x 300m m G RO UND BEAM 750 x 750 x 230m m

750 R C F O O T IN G 1 5 0 th k . W E L L
750 750 CO M PACTED HARDCORE
50m m LEAN CONCRETE
230
1 2 5 x 1 2 5 T A N A P IL E W H E R E
115 x 300m m G RO UND BEAM R E Q U IR E D T O B E D IR E C T E D B Y P .P 50m m LEAN CO NCRETE 4 T 1 2 B /W
750
T Y P IC A L R C C O L U M N D E T A IL
F R O N T V IE W O F B R IC K W A L L F E N C IN G
3 S T R A N D S P .V .C . C O A T E D B A R B E D 150 230
W IR E A T T A C H E D T O P O S T B Y 75 125
H E A V Y S P L IT P IN S
800
230
300
6 3 x 6 3 x 6 m m M .S . A N G L E
W IT H 3 S T R A N D S O F B A R B E D W IR E
45°
1 0 0 x 1 2 5 m m C O P IN G B E A M
100
S E C T IO N A -A S E C T IO N B -B S E C T IO N C -C
300
1 1 5 m m T H IC K C E M E N T / S A N D
B R IC K W A L L W IT H 2 0 P L A S T E R IN G
B O T H S ID E S NOTES :
2200
1. A LL C O N C R E TE U S E D SH A LL BE G R AD E C 25.
2 . M IN IM U M C O V E R T O R E IN F O R C E M E N T S H A L L B E 2 5 m m .
3 . A L L B R IC K S U S E D S H A L L B E F IR S T Q U A L IT Y C E M E N T / S A N D B R IC K S .
4 . B R IC K W O R K S H A L L B E R E IN F O R C E D W IT H E X P A N D E D M E T A L O R "E X M E T " A T E V E R Y F O U R T H
150 x 300m m G R O U N D BEAM
C O U R S E C O M M E N C IN G S T W O C O U R S E S A B O V E G R O U N D B E A M L E V E L .
MIN. 900
300
5 . B R IC K W O R K W A L L S S H A L L B E A N C H O R E D T O C O N C R E T E F A C E S U S IN G G A L V A N IS E D F IS H T A IL
7 5 0 x 7 5 0 x 2 3 0 m m F O O T IN G A N C H O R S T O L A P IN W IT H T H E B R IC K R E IN F O R C E M E N T A T E V E R Y F O U R T H C O U R S E
1 2 5 x 1 2 5 T A N A P IL E W H E R E C O M M E N C IN G T W O C O U R S E S A B O V E G R O U N D B E A M L E V E L .
R E Q U IR E D T O B E D IR E C T E D B Y P .P
230
6 . M O R T A R F O R B R IC K W O R K S H A L L B E S E T IN 1 :1 :5 C E M E N T -L IM E -S A N D M O R T A R .
750
7 . P L A S T E R IN G A N D R E N D E R IN G T O S U R F A C E O F B R IC K W A L L S H A L L B E F IN IS H E D T O A M IN IM U M
T Y P IC A L C R O S S S E C T IO N O F B R IC K W A L L F E N C IN G T H IC K N E R S O F 2 0 m m W IT H 1 :3 C E M E N T -S A N D N O R T A R .
P A IN T IN G
1 .) A L L E X P O S E D W A L L S H A L L B E P A IN T E D W IT H O N E U N D E R C O A T O F A P P R O V E D R E S IS T IN G P R IM E R S E A L E R A N D T W O
A P P R O V E D W E A T H E R R E S IS T A N T E M U L S IO N P A IN T .

Industry Guidelines
Figure 6.7 Precast Fencing
3200 3200
800
230
800
4T12
LINKS R6-150
230 x 230mm
RC COLUMN
AT 3m INTERVALS
2200
2200
PRE-CAST CONCRETE
W ALL 75mm THICK
SURFACE TO BE ROUGHENED
FINISHED GRD. LEVEL

FINISHED GRD. LEVEL
TYPICAL RC COLUMN DETAIL

FRONT VIEW OF PRE-CAST FENCING
R6-100 C/C
230
3 STRANDS P.V.C. COATED BARBED

WIRE ATTACHED TO POST BY 75 T12 T12
230
HEAVY SPLIT PINS
800
63 x 63 x 6mm M.S. ANGLE T12 T12

WITH 3 STRANDS OF BARBED WIRE
4 5°
SECTION A-A
300
PRE-CAST CONCRETE WALL

75mm THICK NOTES :
1. ALL CONCRETE USED SHALL BE GRADE C25.
2200
PRE-CAST CONCRETE WALL 2. MINIMUM COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 25mm.

75mm THICK 3. FOUNDATION AS PER THE DESIGN OF THE ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE.
PAINTING
1.) ALL EXPOSED WALL SHALL BE PAINTED W ITH ONE UNDERCOAT OF APPROVED RESISTING
PRIMER SEALER AND TWO COATS OF APPROVED WEATHER RESISTANT EMULSION PAINT.
2.) TWO BANDS OF IWK'S COLOUR WITH OVERALL HEIGHTS
OF 400mm SHALL BE PAINTED ON EXTERIOR FACE OF THE WALL.
3.) COLOUR STANDARDS
TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF PRE-CAST FENCING A.) INTERIOR/EXTERIOR WALL - DULUX TUNGSTEN (10412) OR EQUIVALENT
B.) BANDS - BLUE - DULUX GLOSS FINISH
(PANTONE 300C) OR EQUIVALENT
- GREEN - DULUX GLOSS FINISH

Figure 6.8 Masony Fencing
B
3 STRANDS P.V.C. COATED BARBED
WIRE ATTACHED TO POST BY
HEAVY SPLIT PINS
63 x 63 x 6mm M.S. ANGLE
WITH 3 STRANDS OF BARBED WIRE
390mmx190mmx190mm BOND BEAM BLOCK
390mmx190mmx190mm FULL BLOCK
1 NO HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT
390mm x 190mm x 190mm BOND BEAM BLOCK

B
ELEVATION
SECTION A-A
ANTI-CLIMB
SECTION B-B
NOTE :-
1 NO. HORIZONTOL REINFORCEMENT 1. FOUNDATION AS PER THE DESIGN OF THE ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE
390mmx190mm190mm BOND BEAM BLOCK 2. ALL MASONRY UNITS (CONCRETE BLOCKS) USED MUST BE UNDER
SIRIM CERTIFICATION SCHEME
3. CONCRETE MIX USED FOR GROUTING TO BE GRADE 20
4. CEMENT MORTAR USED FOR JOINTS TO BE 1:3 MIX
PAINTING
390mmx190mmx114mm FULL BLOCK 1.) ALL EXPOSED WALL SHALL BE PAINTED WITH ONE UNDERCOAT
OF APPROVED RESISTING PRIMER SEALER AND TWO COATS OF
APPROVED WEATHER RESISTANT EMULSION PAINT.
2.) TWO BANDS OF IWK'S COLOUR WITH OVERALL HEIGHTS
OF 400mm SHALL BE PAINTED ON EXTERIOR FACE OF THE WALL.
1 NO HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT 3.) COLOUR STANDARDS
390mmx190mmx190mm BOND BEAM BLOCK A.) INTERIOR/EXTERIOR WALL - DULUX TUNGSTEN (10412)
B.) BANDS - BLUE - DULUX GLOSS FINISH OR EQUIVALENT
- GREEN - DULUX GLOSS FINISH

Industry Guidelines
6.7 Beautification Zone and Landscape
Treatment plants shall be effectively and visually screened by a

beautification zone within the treatment plant site of not less than 2 m wide,
on which selected species of trees and shrubs can be planted. In congested
or difficult locations, the Commission should be consulted on these
requirements.
Premix or Paved area shall be provided at this zone for all class 1 treatment
plants with loading equal or less than 1,000PE or where necessary.
6.8 Stores and Workshops
All Class 4 Treatment plants that exceed 20,000 PE and have a pump
station within the premises shall be provided with an active store and
workshop.
6.9 Spares
All mechanical units shall be provided with an adequate reserve supply of

critical spare parts. A list of proposed spare parts should be forwarded for
approval when detailed designs are submitted for verification and
approval.
All parts recommended by the manufacturer to be provided with spares

shall be so delivered at the stage of final inspection. Notwithstanding that,
all parts with a life span of 3 years or less shall be provided with spares
Typical spare parts requirements are provided in Table 6.2. Spare parts
shall be obtained from the original manufacturer of the equipment and
shall be packed and protected for storage to BS1133 requirement.
A set of special tools if required and specific to an equipment including

lifting tackle and greasing equipment necessary for the maintenance,
repair, testing and overhauled of the equipment shall be supplied together
with the spares at the stage of final inspection.

Table 6.2 Spare Part
No. Equipment Spare Parts Quantity

1. Pumps: Bearing one set
Raw Sewage o-ring one set
Submersible oil seal one set
Pumps. mechanical seal one set
Grit Pumps. wear ring one set
Feeding Pumps. Impeller (for 3 or more one set
RAS Pumps. pump of similar model) one set, whichever parts is
Sludge Pumps. (see Pumps, Motors, relevant
Effluent Pumps. Drives)
2. Motors (Electric): Bearing one set
o-ring one set
oil seal one set
mechanical seal one set
3 Drives
a)Direct Couple gear bearing one set
b)Chain chain one set
sprocket one set
c)Belt V-belt one set
4 Mechanically Raked Chain one set
Screens Chain link one set
Gear sprocket one set
(also see Motors, one set, whichever parts is
Drives) relevant
5. Diaphragm Pump diaphragm one set
6. Progressive Cavity rubber stator one set
(Mono) Pump
7. Blowers (see Motors, Drives) one set, whichever parts is
relevant
8. Aerator:
Diffused Air Diffusers 10% of total numbers
Mechanical (surface, (see Motors, Drives) one set, whichever parts is
brush) relevant
9. Scraper rotating collectors one set
wheel one set per clarifier
(see Motors, Drives) one set, whichever parts is
relevant
10. Conveyor (see Motors, Drives) one set, whichever parts is
relevant

Industry Guidelines
Table 6.2 Spare Part (cont.)
No. Equipment Spare Parts Quantity

11. Filter Press oil seal for hydraulic one set
pump one pair out of every five
membrane cloth pair of plates
12. Belt Press oil seal for hydraulic one set
pump one set if the STP has only
Belt one press
13. Centrifuges (see Drives) one set, whichever parts is
relevant
6.10 Yard Lighting
Effective yard and building lighting systems shall be incorporated within

the treatment plant site in order to provide sufficient illumination for
operation and maintenance schedules to be carried out during day and
night periods. In addition, the entire treatment plant site shall have
sufficient street lights and perimeter lights for various operations, safety
and security reasons.
Compound lighting shall be provided at every 50 m interval for all manned

and security plants. However, sufficient lighting is required at the strategic
location such as entrance gate, inlet works and necessary areas. Refer to
Table 6.3.
All lighting shall be accessible for maintenance / removal. Typical details

of compound lighting are shown in Figure 6.9.
Table 6.3 – Numbers of Unit and Location of Compound Lighting
Minimum
Class of Population
Numbers Location
STP Equivalent
of Unit
1 ≤1,000 1 Inlet Works or Entrance

Inlet Works and Treatment Process
2 1001 – 5000 2
Unit
Every Internal Corner of STP boundry
4 and nearby to Inlet Works, Treatment
3 5,001 – 20,000
Process Unit and Sludge Treatment
Entrance, Inlet Works, Mess Building,
50 meter Process Treatment Unit, Secondary
4 > 20,000
Treatment Unit and Sludge Treatment.

Figure 6.9 Typical Details of Compound Lighting

670
105
290
105
6000
250 STANDARD GALVANISED
STREET LAMP POST
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LAMP POST
6.11 Sampling Facilities
Suitable sampling facilities shall be provided (preferably in the form of an

open chamber) within the boundary of the STP to allow representative
samples to be taken safely by one person. For treatment plants up to
20,000 PE, sufficient space shall be allowed for proper preparation of
samples to be taken away to central laboratories for further testing and
analysis. The sampling area shall contain sufficient bench space and
storage space for samples. For treatment plants greater than 20,000 PE, the
sampling area shall be provided in accordance with MS 1228. Access
ladder shall be provided for sampling facilities where necessary. Internal
surface area for sampling point shall be tiled with clear coloured tiles
6.12 Auto Restart Facilities
All electrical equipment shall be fitted with auto restart facilities for quick
re-operation in the event of failure of power facilities.

Industry Guidelines
6.13 Safety Facilities
Safe access and walkways shall be provided at all process units and
equipment (valves, penstocks, aeration tanks, etc.) that require service and
maintenance. Safety handrails shall also be installed at walkways and other
working areas with a fall greater than 2 m. Typical details of hand rail are
shown in Figure 6.10
All chemical storage facilities shall be provided with a safety shower and
eyewash as well as appropriate warning signs. Liquid chemical storage
facilities shall be bund. Access to the area shall be restricted using lockable
doors/gates.
Provision for fire detection, alarm and fire fighting equipment shall be
complying with the latest requirements in the Uniform Building Bylaws,
the Institute of Electrical Engineers (IEE) guidelines and other statutory
requirements.
All tanks shall not exceed 1.2m above ground.
Stair case and ladder exceeding 1.2m shall be provided with handrail
All plants located adjacent to earth slopes shall be provided with proper
slope protection structures. The slope protection design must be certified
by Qualified Professional Engineer.
6.14 Doors
All external doors shall be of weather proof and suitable for out-door
installation.
Door with sufficient width for the manoeuvre of equipment shall be

provided at the building of pump station, blower room, etc. For opening
more than 4 meter wide or 5 meter high, motorized roller shutter shall be
provided complete with manual over-ride button, which enables it to be
operated during power interruption.
6.15 Fire Hydrant
For treatment plants above 20,000PE, fire hydrant shall be provided

complying with the requirements of Jabatan Bomba.

6.16 Power Supply
Power supply shall be provided to each plant from the approved source.
Drawings submitted for approval shall indicate the locations of electrical
power tapping point and schematic layout plan. Approval for power supply
tapping should be obtained from relevant authority for permanent power
supply before submitting inspection form. All related document, such as
electrical bills, transfer of ownership: to be submitted before final
inspection. Requirement of power shall be finalised prior to obtaining
design approval
Requirement of incoming permanent power supply shall be inline with

Section 4 this Volume.
6.17 Internal Sanitation (Toilet)
All plants shall be provided with toilet. The toilet shall consist of water
tap, water closet, shower and wash basin. The area for toilet shall comply
with Uniform Building By Laws. Toilet to be located beside the control
panel building. Toilets can also be located in the mess or office building.
6.18 Lifting Requirement
Safe lifting weight in unrestricted area is 16 kg. For heavier objects and/or
very tight locations, provision of crane or access for truck mounted crane
to be made.
Lifting requirements are as follows:
- Weight < 16 kg: Manual lifting

- 16 kg ≤ Weight ≤ 250 kg: A davit or ‘A’ frame shall be arranged
to allow items lifted by using manual
chain hoist to be projected on a
1.2 m truck tray and positioned at 2m
above road level. In the pump station,
motorized hoist is required for lifting
weight exceeding 100kg.
- Weight > 250 kg: A gantry with motorised hoist shall be
arranged to allow items to be projected
on a 1.2m truck tray and positioned at
2m above road level truck tray.

Industry Guidelines
Lifting equipment shall be subjected to DOSH approval standards and

guidelines.
Safe Working Load with approved method of installation shall be rated
and printed for all lifting facilities. Height and lifting method must be
considered in the design for Safe Working Load of lifting facilities.
All portable motorised hoist shall be of 230 V operating voltage and fixed
electrical hoist shall be of 415 V operating voltage.
All fixed 3 axis type gantry shall come with additional safety features such
as travel stop limit switch, hoist over run limit switch, slow & fast speed
mode and emergency stop (for all type of hoist).
All fixed type outdoor lifting facility futures shall comprise of hoist
parking bay with shade. All fixed type lifting facility shall come with
working platform and excess ladder.
Typical drawings of lifting davits and A-frame lifting facilities are shown
in Figure 6.11 and Figure 6.12.
6.19 Ventilation
Ventilation is the process of letting in outside air into a space so that it

mixes with the inside atmosphere to dilute contaminants and replenish
oxygen. The purpose of ventilation in a sewage treatment plant is to
provide a comfortable and safe working environment for all plant
personnel.
Hence proper ventilation shall be provided as a mean of providing

sufficient fresh air and reducing poisonous or explosive gases in enclosed
or semi-enclosed spaces where access to human is allowed. Ventilation can
be achieved naturally or mechanically:
• Natural ventilation uses the force of nature such as air currents,

breezes, thermal gradients and pressure differences to move air in
and out of the space.
• Mechanical ventilation uses fans and blowers to force air through

space. It is also sometimes called forced ventilation.
Particular requirements are:

a) Ventilation shall be intrinsically safe with respect to explosive
gases (such as methane) where such gases may be present.
b) Ventilation shall be designed to deal with the different densities of
the various gases.

c) Ventilation fans shall be located outside the enclosed space to

induce forced air into the plant. Intake locations shall be such that
only fresh air is drawn into the system and not air recirculated from
the exhaust.
d) Mechanical ventilation shall be used if the system is required to
remove contaminants.
e) Ventilation exhaust shall be directed to a suitable location for
discharge and it shall not be adjacent to the intake point.
f) Ventilation at rooms where heat generation may take place must be
adequate to dissipate the heat generated to ensure a comfortable
making ambient for the equipment and the operator.
g) Noise levels associated with operating fans and blowers,
particularly in a confined space, shall conform to the requirements
in Section 4 of this Guidelines and other stationary requirements.
h) Optimise recurring cost for operation, maintenance and
replacement.
i) Regular testing and inspection of the equipment
j) Compliance with the suggested ventilation requirements. Table 6.4
presents some commonly used values for ventilation rates in typical
enclosed spaces of a sewage treatment plant: -

Industry Guidelines
Table 6.4 Common ventilation rates
Minimum Ventilation Rate

Space Remarks
(Air Changes/hour, ac/hr)
Wet Well 30 intermittent Use 100% outside air. Step up to
12 continuous 24 ac/hr if hazardous gases are
detected. Consider odour control,
where warranted
Dry Well 30 intermittent
12 continuous
Grit Removal/Screen 30 intermittent Same as wet well
Area 12 continuous
Digester Gas Control 30 intermittent Same as wet well

Room 12 continuous
Sludge Gas 30 intermittent Same as wet well
Compressor Room 12 continuous
Enclosed Grit 30 intermittent Same as wet well
Loading Areas 12 continuous
Enclosed Primary 30 intermittent Same as wet well
Sedimentation Tanks 12 continuous
Scum Concentration 30 intermittent Same as wet well

Tank 12 continuous
Chlorine and Sulphur 60 intermittent Hazardous areas, toxic fumes,
Dioxide Rooms floor level exhaust required.
12 continuous
Interlock fans with manual
switches located at each entrance.
Also interlock fans with chlorine
and sulphur dioxide detection.
Use 100% outside air
Filter/Dewatering 12 continuous Consider odour control for exhaust
Area air from dewatering area, where
warranted
All other enclosed 30 intermittent In particular at blower room, high
unit processes not tension room, low voltage room,
12 continuous
mentioned elsewhere switchboard and control panel
rooms, where there are tendency
of heat generation

k) An audible and visible warning shall be provided at all entry

points. This shall automatically operate if the fan fails.
l) Where natural or forced ventilation is provided, it shall be installed
in such a manner so as to avoid any ingress of water due to rain or
other sources.
m) In areas with routine entry by personnel, the ventilation strategy
shall emphasize adequate control of contaminants and the
ventilation system shall be continuously operated.
6.20 Process Water
The designer is encouraged to provide recycle water facilities from the

treated effluent. The recycle water can be utilised for cleaning and
landscaping purposes.
6.21 Aesthetic
The structure of a treatment plant shall blend with the surrounding

development to improve the aesthetic value of the area. Roof, structure
wall or brickwall fancing can be designed with other than conventional
finishing.
6.22 Close Turfing
Unpaved area within the STP reserve shall be turfed with close turfing.
The type of grass must be “cow grass”. For slope area, turf must be pegged
to avoid grass wash away during water run-off.
6.23 Standard Roofing and related requirement
Roof for control panel shall be of flat roof and shall be installed with water
proving material on the final layer. The slope of flat roof shall be 1: 20 and
gutter shall be provided.
However, for the aesthetic purpose Pitch type roof may be provided. The
slope shall be 30 degree from horizontal. Suitable material for roof such as
roof tile is recommended.
The design of roof shall be considered from the following:
i) Suitable material for roof (flat or slope) including colour

ii) Adequate air for ventilations

Industry Guidelines
iii) Enough heights for lifting facilities

iv) Enough heights for access and headroom
v) Type of insulation
vi) Acoustic treatment where applicable
6.24 Painting
Painting shall include all plant and machinery inside buildings, including
pipework, grating, handrailing, internal walls below ground level and all
metal work including machinery.
The conduits and piping shall be appropriately named and labelled

indicating flow directions and painted with the following colour codes for
easy identification:
Chlorine line - yellow with double green bands
Compressed air line - green
Fuel gas line - orange
Potable water supply line - blue
Raw sewage line - black
Final effluent line - grey
Sludge line - brown
Non-potable water line - blue with double black bands
Other disinfectant lines - yellow with double red bands
Biogas line - yellow
The labels shall be stencilled on the piping in a contrasting colour with the
colour coded bands, if any, located at appropriate and strategic points.
Colour codes selected for general equipment, building and others items in
a sewage treatment plants shall be adhered to colour standards as detailed
in Table 6.5. The types of paint and surface preparation used shall be as
recommended by the paint manufacturer.

Table 6.5 – Painting System Index – Colour Standards
Equivalent
Item Colour
Colour Guide
General Equipment including motors (unless Dark Blue Dulux Regal Blue
come with the original manufacturer 0013
approved colour code) Par Mandarin Blue
0013
Penstocks/Valves/Manhole Covers Black Par Bituminous
Black
Machinery Yellow Dulux Lemon 2024
Guards/Railings/Runways/Overhead Par Golden Yellow
Cranes/Lifting Davit
Switchboards Light Grey Dulux Pewter 695
Par Willow Grey
00A05
Fencing poles/Gates Green Dulux A365-13449
Par Green 3666
Building and Walls – Exterior Grey Dulux BS 00A05-
(Weathersheild) 10235
Building and Walls - Interior White
Fencewall – Interior and Exterior Grey Dulux BS 00A05-
10235
Floors - Concrete Interior Green Leigh Green 3666
Building Stripes Green Dulux A910-13448
Par Green 3666
Blue Dulux A910-11482
Par Blue 2686
Indah Water Logo (where applicable) Indah Water Dulux A365-13449
Green Par Green 1006
Indah Water Dulux A365-11483
Blue Par Blue 1007
Notes:
The above painting requirements are not applicable to stainless steel, aluminium,
galvanised metal surfaces except where necessary to comply with statutory health and
safety requirement.

Industry Guidelines
Figure 6.10 Typical Details og Guard Rail
550
1
21/4
1100
150-250
100 33
SIDE PALM BASE

TYPICAL RUN OF HANDRAIL AS
VIEWED FROM WALKWAY SIDE
FLAT BASE
TUBULAR STANDARDS
550
1
21/4
1100
12
100
150-250
100 36
TRIANGULAR BASE
TYPICAL RUN OF HANDRAIL AS
VIEWED FROM WALKWAY SIDE
ROUND BASE
TUBULAR STANDARDS
3000 C/C 3000 C/C

550
1100
550
DETAIL OF HOT DIPPED G.I. RAILING

6.11 : Typical Detail of Lifting Davit
50
0
90
75
50
25
20 25 20
25
30° FL FL
6
450
30
120
6 FILLET WELDED
10
OD=98
SAFE WORKING
LOAD TO BE PLAT THICKNESS 10
INDICATED
1775
250
260
DETAIL `A'
OD = 118
DETAIL `A'
SIDE VIEW SECTION

LIFTING DAVIT
LIFTING DAVIT
NOTE : DEPTH OF SLEEVE SHALL VARIOUS WITH HEIGHT OF POLE ACCORDINGLY
Figure 6.12 : Typical Detail of A Frame Lifting Facilities
1200 2160
203x203x46Kg/m UB 1800
180
203x133x25Kg/m UB
315
203x133x
25Kg/m UB
2340
2340
300x300x12 PLATE BOLTED TO CONCRETE 300x300x12 PLATE BOLTED TO CONCRETE
1500
TO PROVIDE WITH ROLLER OR FIX TO THE CONCRETE TO PROVIDE WITH ROLLER OR FIX TO THE CONCRETE
FLOOR (TO SYSTEM SUPPLIER DESIGN) FLOOR (TO SYSTEM SUPPLIER DESIGN)
SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
A-FRAME WITH I-BEAM A-FRAME WITH I-BEAM

Industry Guidelines
Section 7
Special Requirements
7.1 Temporary Treatment Plants
7.1.1 Definition
Temporary treatment plants refer to sewage treatment plants that are built
to operate on a temporary basis. The sewage will eventually be diverted to
a centralised sewerage system. After then, the temporary treatment plant
will be decommissioned.
There are 2 categories of temporary treatment plants: -
Category 1
For temporary treatment of sewage during the upgrading of an existing
sewerage treatment facility
Category 2
For temporary treatment of sewage during initial stage of a new housing
development where it is not feasible to construct a plant of ultimate
capacity during initial stage or it is located within the catchment of a
centralised sewerage system.
7.1.2 Category 1: Temporary Treatment Plant for Upgrading of

Facilities
During the upgrading of an existing treatment plant, the sewage flows into
that plant shall be directed to a temporary treatment plant for treatment
before discharge. The treatment process of the temporary plant shall be
designed and calculated based on: the duration of the project, total existing
flow and the compliance requirements. The temporary treatment shall be
monitored at regular interval. Approval from the Commission and DOE
must be obtained prior any direct discharge of the untreated sewage into
the receiving watercourse. The temporary treatment plant shall be located
within the compound of the existing site. The temporary treatment plant
shall not be built on other site area unless approval is granted by the
Commission
7.1.2.1 Compliance Standards for Category 1 Temporary Treatment

Plants
Category 1 temporary treatment plant shall comply with the requirements

as stipulated in this Guideline and shall be operated and maintained to the
satisfaction of the Commission and the Director General of the Department
of Environment (DOE) at all times.
The temporary treatment plant shall be designed to comply with the

following minimum effluent requirements:
♦ Standard B for treatment plants located downstream of water intake
points and non-water catchment zones

♦ Standard A for treatment plants located upstream of water intake

points
The above levels shall be interpreted as ‘absolute’ pollutant levels. Final

effluents will be monitored over the life of the temporary plant. A license
to contravene shall be obtained before the construction of any temporary
plant and the commencement of any upgrading works.
The temporary plant shall incorporate provisions to minimize adverse

impacts such as visual, noise, odour nuisance etc. to the surroundings.
7.1.2.2 Process Requirements for Temporary Treatment Plants
Alternative or innovative designs may be used for temporary plant to meet

the general design compliance as stipulated above.
Unit processes within the temporary treatment plant can be designed to

absolute standards. For example, a Standard A the effluent level of
temporary treatment plant of this category can be designed to 20 mg/l
BOD and 50 Mg/l SS.
Materials for construction can be of semi-permanent installation such as

fiberglass tanks, mild-steel with epoxy coat, etc.
7.1.2.3 Operation of Temporary Treatment Plants
During the upgrading of an existing plant, the project proponent shall

appoint a licensed operator to operate and maintain the temporary plant. If
the upgrading contractor is a licensed operator, they may be appointed as
the operator of the temporary plant.
7.1.3 Category 2: Temporary Plants for New Housing Development
(I) Multiple Phases Hosing Development
Temporary plant shall be provided for multiple phases housing

development where it is not feasible to construct a plant with ultimate
capacity during initial stage.
Sewage treatment plant reserves must be located as far as practicable from

habitable buildings. The needs of a temporary plant in a multiple phases
housing development project depend on: phases of development, size of
each development phase, location of initial development and duration of
the phase lag and entire development plan.
The project proponent will construct a temporary treatment plant in

compliance with the following criteria:-

Industry Guidelines
♦ Temporary plant will be decommissioned by the developer within

time frame agreed between the Commission and the developer.
♦ Implementation program for ultimate plant is confirmed in
accordance to an approved catchment study.
♦ All temporary plant shall remain as private plant and shall be
operated and maintained by a licensed operator appointed by the
project proponent.
(II) Future Connection to Centralised STP
This applies to a catchment where implementation program to construct a

centralised sewage treatment plant is approved but the completion date
could not meet the project proponent’s needs. Under such circumstances,
the project proponent may be allowed to build a temporary treatment plant.
7.1.3.1 Provision of Land for Temporary Treatment Plants
The owner will be required to allocate land within the housing

development for the construction of all temporary works. However, the site
of the temporary treatment plant shall not be located on future public
amenities land.
The project proponent of the temporary treatment plant will be required to

construct the temporary sewer reticulation within the development to
convey sewage to the temporary treatment plant. At the same time, the
project proponent must also construct the permanent sewer reticulation for
the connection to the permanent plants or the centralised sewerage system.
7.1.3.2 Compliance Standards for Temporary Treatment Plants
This category of temporary treatment plant shall comply with the

requirements as stipulated in this Guideline. The plant shall also be
maintained to the satisfaction of the Commission and the Director General
of the Department of Environment (DOE) at all times.
The temporary treatment plant shall be designed and maintained to comply

with the following minimum effluent requirements:
♦ Standard B for treatment plants located downstream of water intake

points and non-water catchment zones
♦ Standard A for treatment plants located upstream of water intake
points
7.1.3.3 Process Requirements for Temporary Treatment Plants
Temporary treatment plants shall be designed to the requirements set out in

Sections 3, 4 and 6 of this volume.

An alternative design may be considered for the temporary treatment plant

that will be decommissioned within time frame agreed between the
Commission and the developers.
Materials for construction can be of semi-permanent installation such as

fiberglass tanks, mild-steel with epoxy coat, etc.
Filter systems may use refurbished filter material that meet the relevant
standards. However, other equipment used within the works shall be new.
Second-hand equipment is strictly prohibited.
7.1.3.4 Operation of Temporary Treatment Plants
Temporary plant shall remain as private plant. The owner must appoint a
licensed operator to operate and maintain the plant.
Temporary treatment plants shall strictly comply to the requirements as

stipulated by this Guideline and shall be operated to the satisfaction of the
Commission and the Director General of DOE at all times.
Temporary treatment plants shall be designed and constructed so as not to

present any nuisance in terms of odour, noise, safety and visual impact to
the nearby community.
7.1.3.5 Ancillary Requirement of Temporary Treatment Plants
Temporary treatment plants shall be provided with proper security fencing

in compliance with Section 6 of this Guidelines.
Adequate access roads and drainage shall be provided.
Landscaping of treatment plant shall be provided for better aesthetic value

surrounding the plant.

Industry Guidelines
7.2 Treatment Plants Located Within Buildings
7.2.1 Introduction
The installation of treatment facilities within buildings whether occupied

or not, including basements of buildings, are not desirable and will not
normally approve. Every effort must be made to come up with an
alternative site or an arrangement to connect to a public system.
Owners must resolve these issues at an early stage of the planning process.
The Commission should be contacted early to establish if an alternative
option is feasible.
If approved, such installations will be subjected to stringent service

condition requirements for the following criteria:
a) Access
b) Ventilation
c) Electrical requirements for lighting system
d) Noise control
e) Process type
f) Inlet works
g) Pre-treatment
h) Confined space safety
i) Odour Control
j) Discharge systems
k) Flood mitigation measures
l) Operation and maintenance
m) General safety and health
n) Sludge handling
o) Sanitary and plumbing facilities
p) Fire Fighting Equipment
Treatment plants within buildings will be considered as private treatment

plants subject to eventual phasing out and replacement by a centralised
system.

7.2.2 Specific Guidelines and Requirements
The specific guidelines and requirements for the criteria specified in 7.2.1
are listed below.
(I) Access
a) Vehicle access must be provided from the nearest public highway.

b) Parking space for a desludging and service vehicle must be within
operating range.
c) Access must be continuously available and unobstructed.
d) Accessible to water and electricity supplies.
e) Sampling point to be available for final effluent.
f) Allowance must be made for installation and removal of
equipment.
g) Provision must be made for lifting of heavy equipment.
h) Suitable arrangements must be made for service and repair of
equipment.
II) Ventilation
Ventilation design shall be in compliance with the requirements in

Section 6 and the specific requirements listed below:
a) Suitable system must be provided to address poisonous, explosive

and lack of oxygen conditions.
b) Separate and independent (from the basement) ventilation must be
provided for the confined spaces.
c) Ventilation shall be of forced mechanical type.
d) Ventilation must be intrinsically safe with respect to explosive
gases such as methane.
e) Ventilation must be designed to deal with the different densities of
the various gases.
f) Ventilation fan must be located outside the enclosed space to
induce forced air into the plant. Intake locations shall be such that
only fresh air from outside the building id drawn into the system
and not air re0circulated within the building.
g) Ventilation exhaust must be directed outside the building for
discharge.
h) Ventilation air exchanges shall be as follows:
i) Intermittent: Minimum of 30 complete air changes per hour

Industry Guidelines
ii) Continuous: Minimum of 12 complete air changes per hour

i) A backup fan must be provided in the event of duty fan failure and
must be automatic on entry.
j) A petrol driven generator with an auto restart facility must be
provided to continually operate the ventilation system in the event
of power failure.
(III) Electrical Requirements for Lighting System
a) Only high-intensity, low-voltage discharge lamps to be used for

floodlighting of plant area during operation and maintenance.
b) The lighting and electrical equipment must be both vapour and
explosion proof.
c) A separate housing must be provided for electrical controls to
prevent electrical sparks from coming into contact with flammable
and explosive gases.
d) All electrical equipment must be water proof against submersion.
e) Standby generators must be provided to allow the plant to operate
independently of the mains supply.
(IV) Noise Control
a) Adequate dampening of noise must be provided to meet minimum

stipulated requirements by the local Building By-laws, DOE and/or
other regulatory bodies. Silencers and acoustic enclosures shall be
provided where required to achieve the stipulated noise level
reduction.
b) Noise control measures shall be implemented to control the
generated noise level to below 65 dB at a distance of 2 m from the
boundary of the housed noise source.
c) General noise levels (measured in decibel units) must also be
measured 10 m from any point of the plant site within the nearest
public space or occupied space or both to an acceptable level
stipulated by the regulator.
d) Enclosures used to achieve these noise reductions shall permit
ready access to equipment for routine maintenance. Adequate air
ventilation shall be provided to allow cooling of the air inside the
enclosure to prevent over heating of the equipment/motors.
(V) Process Type
The type of treatment process must be limited to systems that are easy to
operate and maintain for reasons of:
a) lower sludge yield and more stable sludge characteristics

b) lower operational and maintenance requirements
(VI) Inlet Works
The design shall incorporate some means of controlling the influent

velocity to prevent:
a) excessive wear due to scouring effects
b) excessive head loss in the inlet
c) uncontrolled overflow of raw sewage
d) release of sewer gases
(VII) Pre-treatment
a) The design must include a macerator to

i) reduce toilet waste and large solids into smaller and finer
particles,
ii) reduce the quantity of screenings
iii) improve the ease of handling.
b) Screening must be provided at 10 to 12 mm clear spacing to
remove fine particles.
c) A combined grit and grease removal system must be provided.
(VIII) Confined Space Safety
a) Operators must:
i) attend a recognised confined spaces training course,
ii) obtain training certificates, and
iii) be certified competent to operate in such an environment.
b) Confined space areas within the plant site must be clearly identified
before handover for operation.
c) Confined space areas must be demarcated and warning notices
placed.
d) Confined space procedures must be established and followed by
operatives.
e) The following must be provided:
i) rescue sets of breathing apparatus
ii) gas detection equipment, preferably electronic, and serviced
regularly

Industry Guidelines
f) The design of the treatment plant shall be subject to a Hazard and

Operability Review (HAZOP) exercise to identify and reduce the
potential risks under the following scenarios:
i) electrical failure
ii) blockage of inlet and outlet
iii) equipment failure including lighting and ventilation
iv) blockage of any pipework
v) flooding of external discharge point
vi) failure of building drainage system
g) The consequences of such failures to operators may include:
i) flooding
ii) explosion
iii) drowning
iv) falling into open voids
v) asphyxia
vi) poison
vii) nausea
(IX) Odour Control
a) Isolate odorous gases from general ventilation exhausts by

containing identified odour generating sources with a separate local
exhaust system.
b) Containment of the odour sources shall be by installing lightweight
and corrosion resistant covers/enclosures designed for practical
operation and maintenance works.
c) The local exhaust odorous air shall be conveyed through well
designed and balanced ductworks by a centrifugal fan to an
effective odour treatment equipment
d) Odour treatment equipment shall be selected such that odours be
reduced to the lowest possible level and in compliance with the
EQA
e) The potential of odour generation, its impact and treatment, shall be
considered in all aspects of design.
(X) Discharge Systems
Most basement plants will lie below the level of the running drain levels.
Therefore, it is essential to:

a) provide an effluent collecting sump prior to pumped discharge

b) provide a check valve at the end of the discharge pipe to prevent
the backflow from the monsoon drain to the treatment plant
c) provide a 100% redundancy of the discharge pumping capacity
(XI) Flood Mitigation Measures
a) Provision must be made for the isolation of the treatment plant

from flooding by external sources.
b) A sump pump shall be provided.
(XII) Operation and Maintenance Agreements
a) All treatment plants installed in basements of buildings must be

subject to an Operation and Maintenance Agreement. An example
of the standard Operation and Maintenance Agreement is given in
Volume 2 of these Guidelines.
b) All treatment plants located within buildings must be operated by a
fully licensed operator and will be subject to periodic checks by the
Commission to ensure compliance.
(XIII) Occupational Safety and Health
a) All treatment plants shall be designed to comply with the

Occupational Safety and Health Act, 1994. Properly designed
treatment plants will enable the operator to safely handle the
treatment plant throughout its design life. A brief summary of the
contents of Act 514 is attached in Appendix A.
(XIV) Sludge Handling
a) An aerated sludge holding tank shall be provided to keep the sludge

from going septic
b) Permanent pipe work with proper coupling and isolation valve
should be provided adjacent to the access gate for easy coupling
sludge tanker’s hose of hose for during desludging of the sludge
holding tank.
c) To provide sludge pump for desludging purpose
(XV) Sanitary and Plumbing facilities
a) To provide stand pipe for cleaning purposes. Waste water to be

channelled back to the inlet of plant

Industry Guidelines
(XVI) Fire fighting system
a) To provide appropriate fire fighting systems in accordance to

BOMBA and other statutory requirements
7.3 Fully Enclosed Treatment Plant
7.3.1 Definition
A fully enclosed plant is defined as a treatment plant that is designed such

that their treatment unit processes are located within dedicated buildings.
A fully enclosed plant is to be equipped with additional features and

requirements to minimize adverse impact to the surrounding environment.
Fully enclosed treatment plant shall comply with the following criteria:
a) Must be located within a dedicated sewage treatment site

b) Provide with appropriate architectural enclosures building.
c) No unit processes shall be located outside the enclosed
buildings/architectural enclosures
d) Individual treatment unit process may be covered with a permanent
structure or housed in an enclosed building
e) Provide appropriate landscaping to adequately screen the treatment
plant from other developments in the vicinity
Appropriate architecture style, landscaping, architecture surrounding the

treatment plant and fencing type must be used.
When approved, fully enclosed treatment plants must comply with the
general requirements set out in Section 3, 4 and 5 of this Guidelines and
also specific requirements in this Section 7.3 for the following:
i) Provision of Odour control

ii) Noise control and mitigation measures
iii) Minimize visual impact
iv) Avoid aerosol effects
v) Enhance safety, health and operability
(I) Odour Control

The potential for odour generation, its impact and treatment, shall be
considered in all aspects of design.
The range of odorous constituents in such biogenic odours is very wide

and they include: hydrogen sulphide, ammonia, thiols and other organic
sulfur compounds, amines, indole and skatole, volatile fatty acids and a
wide range of organic compounds produced by anaerobic fermentation.
Particular problems can be found at: Inlet works, primary tanks, secondary
treatment, sites for transfer, storage and treatment of raw sludges and
leakages.
A separate local exhaust system, for containment and exhaust of odorous

air to treatment, will isolate such odours from the general ventilation
system.
Odour treatment equipment shall be selected such that odour is reduced to

the lowest possible level and in compliance with the EQA.
Containment, exhaust and treatment shall be designed as an integrated

package.
(II) Noise Control
a) Adequate dampening of noise must be provided to meet minimum

stipulated requirements by the local Building By-laws, DOE and/or
other regulatory bodies. Silencers and acoustic enclosures shall be
provided required to achieve the stipulated noise level reduction.
b) Noise control measures shall be implemented to control the
generated noise level to below 65 dB at a distance of 2 m from the
boundary of the housed noise source.
c) The general noise levels generated shall also be measured 10 m
from any point of the plant site within the nearest public space
and/or occupied space to an acceptable level stipulated by the
appropriate regulators.
d) Enclosures used to achieve these noise reductions shall permit
ready access to equipment for routine maintenance. Adequate air
ventilation shall be provided to allow cooling of the air inside the
enclosure to prevent over heating of the equipments/motors.
(III) Aerosol Effects
Aerosol is defined as a suspension of colloidal particles in gases/

atmosphere. Aerosol control measures are important because aerosol
affects the human respiratory system.

Industry Guidelines
If uncontrolled, aerosol could present a health hazard to the operator and

residents due to the reduced buffer zone around the treatment plant.
Screens, open channels and aeration tanks, where violent and turbulent
actions are encountered, may release aerosol. The design of the treatment
plant shall take into consideration any unit processes that are likely to emit
aerosol and mitigating measures shall be undertaken to counter aerosol
release to the atmosphere.
e) Safety, Health and Operability
The design of a fully enclosed treatment plant shall address safety, health
and operability aspects. The guidelines given for treatment plants located
within buildings in Section 7.2 shall be followed.
7.3.3 Specific Requirements
(I) Covers for Treatment Unit Processes
The purposes of these covers are to contain odour emission at source and
to reduce visual impact.
The design requirements for treatment unit processes are outlined below.
a) Covers to contain odour emission shall be provided at all potential

sources of odour generation for all unit processes located within the
sewage treatment works.
b) Bins used for the storage of screenings and grit collected in the
pretreatment area shall be completely covered to reduce visual
impact, odour and to keep vectors away. The designer shall
provide further considerations on the size, type and method of
emptying the bins.
c) Generally, all unit processes shall be covered or housed within a
building enclosure. This shall include all pretreatment units,
aeration tanks, and sludge treatment and handling facilities. The
only exception is the secondary clarifier.
d) The bin shall be located on a bunded, paved area adjacent to an
access road to the treatment plant.
e) The cover shall comply with BSEN 124 if subject to loading. It
shall also be designed to meet the operating condition of the odour
extraction system as well as the location and application
appropriation.
f) If the cover is exposed to the environment,

i) Plastic or fibreglass cover if used, must be manufactured

with UV inhibitor and will not warp or deform due to
weathering effect.
ii) Metal covers if used, must have appropriate corrosion
resistant coating in accordance to Section 4 of this
Guidelines.
iii) Where chipping might occurs at the edge of the cover,
stainless steel reinforcement frame on all sides of a plastic
or FRP cover shall be provided.
g) Coatings for the concrete and steel shall include coal tar, vinyls and
epoxies in accordance to Section 4.
h) Covers should be hinged and weigh less than 16 kg to enable lifting
unaided. Beyond a cover weight of 16 kg, assisted lifting is
required.
i) All unit processes with covers or are housed in a building for odour
and visual impact reduction shall be provided with proper air
extraction and air scrubbing system. These devices shall be safe to
operate and maintain. Odour, noise and visual impact, and aerosol
are the major components for consideration in the design of an
enclosed wastewater treatment plant. Windows and access hatches
that give the operator an extended and uninterrupted view of the
treatment process are mandatory for all unit processes that are
covered.
j) Covers shall be designed to allow for easy dismantling and easy
access for cleaning of the enclosed plant.
k) The materials used for the cover structure depend on the type of
cover selected and the characteristics of the odorous environment.
In general, the materials shall be selected to provide durability,
ease of maintenance, corrosion resistance and be relatively
inexpensive. The three most common materials used for containing
odours are concrete, aluminum and fiberglass reinforced plastic
(FRP). The design requirements for each of these are outlined
below.
i) Concrete
Concrete can support the greatest weight but limits the plant
maintenance worker’s ability to remove the cover for major
repairs. Concrete covers are subject to corrosion and should
be treated with a protective coating, such as an epoxy resin.
ii) Aluminum
Aluminum covers provide the greatest tensile strength with
the thinnest cross-sectional area and can be placed on a
light weight frame. The lightweight nature and thin cross-

Industry Guidelines
sectional area of aluminum makes it easier to remove and

store the covers during maintenance operations.
Aluminum covers are generally less expensive than FRP
and concrete, but periodic maintenance in the form of an
anodised coating is necessary to help prevent corrosion. The
design of an aluminum cover shall consider the
incompatibility of aluminum with concrete and other
metals. If not, disintegration of the materials occurs and the
structural integrity of the system could be jeopardized.
iii) FRP
FRP is light weight and generally can be removed by plant
operator and stored during maintenance operations. FRP
covers also offer resistance to corrosion, but require periodic
maintenance with an ultraviolet inhibitor to enhance
durability, particularly, if exposed to sunlight on a prolonged
basis.
(II) Ventilation system
Ventilation systems are required to supply fresh air for workers to work in
a more comfortable environment and to minimise health and safety
concerns.
All covered unit processes must have proper ventilation systems.
a) An exhaust ventilation system shall be provided with air

distribution patterns that effectively purge work areas.
b) For waste areas that workers must enter, both blowing and drawing
air shall be used to eliminate dead spots.
c) Areas designed for personnel entry must include relief systems to
avoid overpressure conditions. Designers must estimate cover
system leakage to determine fan capacity.
d) Force air ventilation systems should be inspected and tested
periodically to ensure proper air flow and air distribution.
e) Ventilation of enclosed plants can be either intermittent or
continuous. However, intermittent ventilation is not recommended
because it has a lower degree of safety and more difficult to operate
and maintain than continuous ventilation. Continuous ventilation is
typically more expensive to operate because of higher electricity
costs for running the blowers. Intermittent ventilation typically
requires a higher rate of ventilation. For example, the wet well and
grit removal facility requires 12 air exchanges for continuos
ventilation versus 30 air exchanges for intermittent ventilation.

f) The requirement in Section 6 shall be refer for the design of

exchange rate. If the work site is classified as a confined space,
workers without proper respiratory equipment must not occupy
spaces that cannot be ventilated to less than 25% of the permissible
exposure limit (PEL) of the contaminant and less than 10% of the
lower explosive limit (LEL). For example, hydrogen sulfide which
is one of the most common contaminants in enclosed areas exposed
to wastewater has a ceiling concentration of 30 mg/m3 (20 ppm).
g) Combustible alarms set at a percentage of the LEL and ventilation
failure alarms should be installed in wet wells, screen rooms, or
other enclosed areas where a volatile atmosphere could exist.
These alarms must have both audible and visual indicators to alert
workers that the area is now potentially dangerous as well as
alerting those who are about to enter the problem area.
h) Before entering the enclosed plant, where there is potential for a
hazardous atmosphere to exist, the operator and/or worker must be
able to test for oxygen deficiency, and combustible and toxic gases
or vapors.
i) Ventilation systems shall be designed on the basis that the potential
odourous gases have been isolated and contained by the local
exhaust system for odour control
j) Ventilation design criteria for work space are as follows:
i) Avoid positioning supply and exhaust registers at equal
elevations and on the same enclosure wall. This will
prevent short-circuiting the ventilation system and creating
dead zones (areas with no apparent ventilation or air
motion).
ii) Equip the makeup air supply and exhaust registers with
volume dampers to control the airflow rate. Makeup air
supply should be less than what is exhausted to create
negative air pressure within the enclosure.
iii) A duty and standby ventilation system are mandatory. The
standby shall be 100% that of duty.
iv) An external visual indicator, such as green/red light, to be
provided outside the enclosed plant to warn of ventilation
systems failure.
k) The design of the ventilation system shall take into account the
noise aspects. Generally, the design work shall include for sound
insulating material, resilient mountings or other appropriate devices
to ensure that the plant runs without noise or vibration in its final
installed position. Noise level from machinery shall not exceed the
level stipulated by the regulators.

Industry Guidelines
(III) Odour Control System
a) Isolate odorous gases from general ventilation systems by

containment of identified odour generating sources with a separate
local exhaust system.
b) Containment of the odour sources shall be by installing lightweight
and corrosion resistant covers/enclosures designed for practical
operation and maintenance works.
c) Local exhaust rates for containment shall be designed to provide a
negative pressure, prevent build up of toxic, corrosive or explosive
gases and include provision for process air or air displaced by
changes in the level of liquid inside the covered space
d) The local exhaust odorous air shall be conveyed through well
designed and balanced ductworks by a centrifugal fan to effective
odour treatment equipment.
e) The overall performance of the odour control system shall comply
with the requirements of the Department of Environment (DOE).
f) In situations where specific gases such as hydrogen sulphide and
ammonia are significantly present, consideration shall be given for
the installation of a pre-scrubber unit upstream of the main odour
treatment equipment.
g) Effective odour treatment equipment to be a minimum ninety(90)
percent removal efficient
h) Consideration must be given to the life span of the odour control
system and associated costs in operating and maintaining such a
system.
(IV) Vent Stack
The vent stack shall at a minimum 5 m above ground level to ensure

sufficient dispersion of air. Where the stack is located adjacent to a
building, it should be located at least 1 m above the roof line of this
building.
(V) Noise Level
All mechanical equipment that are likely to generate noise such as blowers,
compressor and pumps, shall be acoustically isolated to ensure the noise
generated are contained and reduced to below the levels stipulated by the
regulators.

(VI) Sludge Handling
a) Due to the compactness of the site, it is not conceivable to have

sludge drying beds in an enclosed environment.
Instead, an aerated sludge holding tank shall be provided to prevent
the sludge from turning septic. Sand drying beds (either covered or
otherwise) are not an acceptable form of sludge treatment in an
enclosed plant.
b) Permanent pipework with female coupling and isolation valve
should be provided adjacent to the access gate for easy coupling of
tanker’s hose during desludge of the holding tank.
(VII) Treatment Process Type
It is preferred that treatment in an enclosed environment employs extended

aeration activated sludge because it offers greater process stability and less
potential for generating odours. However, other treatment processes warrant
further considerations if proven that they have other distinct advantages in
an enclosed environment.
(VIII) Siting of Plant
a) The enclosed plant needs to be located away from driveways to

allow for regular maintenance of the screens, grit and grease
removal units, and wet well of pump stations. If this is not possible,
then bollards shall be erected to protect the workers while
maintaining the plant.
b) Where plants are located within the premise of a private property,
direct vehicle access is to be provided from the public road to the
plant via a gate in the perimeter fence.
(IX) Groundwater Conditions
a) Adequate provision must be made to resist the uplift of the structure

due to hydrostatic ground water pressures. The side and bottom
walls shall be designed to withstand the anticipated hydrostatic
pressures.
b) The top of the plant shall be located at least 150 mm above the
finished surface level to prevent the inflow of surface runoff into the
enclosed plant.
c) Good perimeter drainage is to be provided to ensure that the plant is
not flooded.

Industry Guidelines
(X) Installation and Removal
Installation and the subsequent removal of all mechanical and electrical

equipment need to be taken into account during the design of the cover. The
following requirements must be carefully catered for.
a) Adequate space for servicing must be provided in the design of the

enclosed plant.
b) If the installation and/or removal of the equipment require the
service of a crane or any lifting vehicle, then access must be made
available within the treatment plant for these lifting vehicles.
c) An adequate number of access covers and sizes of openings for the
removal and installation of the equipment shall be provided.
d) The design of an enclosed plant must allow for the plant to be fully
operational during the installation and/or removal of any equipment.
Alternatively, provisions for temporary bypass should be
accommodated to prevent disruption to the sewage flow while this
work is being carried out.
e) In situations where it is not possible to readily install a duty and
standby unit, the standby unit can be supplied as a separate item
which is kept in store, provided that the faulty unit can be removed
and the spare unit can be installed within two hours by general
maintenance workers using normal tools.
(XI) Mechanical and Electrical Requirements
The wiring, lighting and other electrical or mechanical equipment and

appliances that have the potential to generate sparks that may trigger an
explosion shall be designed and installed to meet the relevant safety codes
to avert the possibility of an explosion.
(XII) Building Plan Approval
If a building structure is used to house the enclosed treatment plant, then the
design of this building must comply with the requirements stipulated by the
relevant Building By-Laws.
7.4 Covered and Buried Treatment Plants
7.4.1 Definition
Covered and buried treatment plants refer to treatment plants with covers
that are placed below ground or not more than 1.2 m above ground level.
Covers are provided to reduce the odour, noise and visual impact.

This type of plant is only applicable to Class 1 and Class 2 sewage

treatment plant with treatment capacity no more than 5,000 PE. Special
approval by the Commission must be obtained if the plant capacity exceeds
5000 PE. A compromised buffer zone of 10 m minimum from the fence to
the nearest building boundary line must be provided for this type of plants.
However, the height of the structure is normally limited to 1.2 m above
ground.
7.4.2 General
Covered and buried treatment plants have inherent hazard and restriction in
operability in their actual operation and maintenance. The requirements in
the following sections serve to highlight the minimum improvements that
must be made to these plants in addition to those set out in Section 3, 4, 5
and 6 of the Guidelines.
7.4.3 Specific Requirements for Covered or Buried Plants of

5,000 PE or Less
(I) Openings of Covered and Buried Tanks
The design of these tanks must allow for adequate openings so that the
operator can carry out routine operation and maintenance works in a safe,
efficient and effective manner. These requirements apply to all unit
processes that are covered or buried from the inlet works to the effluent
chamber. Staggered square openings of roughly 600mm x 600mm
employed in the past for plants of this nature would not be acceptable.
These openings, as a minimum, must be opened top around the periphery of
the tank.
(II) Access for Routine Operations and Maintenance of the

Plant
The designer must take into account the confined space and other related
safety issues for entry into such a tank. Provision of proper access into each
individual tank is mandatory. Where the depth exceeds 2.5 m, steps with
intermediate landings must be included. Other requirements, such as
adequate ventilation prior to tank entry, must be considered and provided in
the design.
(III) Pipework and Aeration System Requirements
Piping for buried plant shall be exposed and accessible for ease of
maintenance. PVC pipes are not allowed.
The aeration system (diffuser) must be retrievable from top opening without
emptying the tank.

Industry Guidelines
(VI) Lighting
Adequate lighting must be provided through adequate opening at the top of

these covered or buried tanks to provide a good view of the treatment
process such as the air diffusion system, screening, degritting and secondary
clarification. This is important for daily plant operations through visual
inspection of the individual unit process and routine maintenance of the
plant.
(V) Hand Railings
Hand railing provisions must be made to prevent falling into open spaces.
These hand rails must be provided on the perimeter of the open tanks and
further enhanced with kick plates.
(VI) Desludging Activities
Adequate access within the proposed treatment plant site is to be made

available to allow for desludging tankers to be within the reach of the waste
activated sludge storage tanks without undue difficulty of maneuvering the
vehicle or damaging the buried tanks or pipe works.
(VII) Labeling of Treatment Unit Process
Labeling of each treatment unit is to be provided, from the inlet works to the
secondary clarifiers, to avoid confusion with the similar geometry and sizes
used for most treatment units.
(VIII) Noise Control
Due to the compromised buffer requirements and proximity to adjacent

developments, the potential for noise pollution is accentuated. The designer
must ensure all noise generating mechanical and electrical equipment within
the treatment plant must be contained and treated acoustically to meet
compliance to existing noise levels stipulated by the Department of
Environment, and that set out in Section 4.
(IX) Ventilation
Adequate ventilation must be made available to allow for the safe routine
operation and scheduled maintenance of the treatment plant. During design,
this ventilation aspect must be considered. The type of ventilation, portable
or permanent, must also be determined during design stage.
(X) Odour Control
Odour Control systems to be provided as required in compliance to the EQA

(XI) Buoyancy Effects
The designer must account for the buoyancy effects in the design of buried
or covered tanks. This effect is of concern during high groundwater
conditions and emptying of the tank content during desludging works.
Furthermore, the designer must ensure that the design of these tanks
accounts for the hydrostatic force exerted on the floor from the outside does
not exceed the compressive strength of these covered or buried tanks. This
is to prevent any breakthrough of the floor and subsequent failure of the
tank.
The designer must ensure that the design of these tank at worse case
scenario where the tank is fully emptied. This is to prevent any
breakthrough of the floor and subsequent failure of the tank.
(XII) Covers
Covers if employed for odour, visual and noise impacts shall be subjected to
the following requirements:
a) Lifting may be unaided if the covers are hinged and weigh less 16
kg.
b) Assisted lifting is required if the covers weigh equal to or above 16
kg.
c) The cover shall comply with BSEN124 loading requirements.
d) If the cover is exposed to the environment,
i) Plastic or fibreglass cover if used, must be manufactured with
UV inhibitor and will not warp or deform due to weathering
effect.
ii) Metal covers if used, must have appropriate corrosion resistant
coating in accordance to Section 4 of this Guidelines.
iii) Where chipping might occurs at the edge of the cover,
stainless steel reinforcement frame on all sides of a plastic or
FRP cover shall be provided.
(XIII) Fencing
Adequate fencing must be provided for all plants. Adequate security shall
be provided against unauthorised access.

Industry Guidelines
7.5 Guidelines for Homestead Developments
7.5.1 Single Developments up to 30 Units or 150 PE in Total
Individual septic tanks may be allowed for single developments of up to 30

units or 150 PE in total.
Septic tanks will be regarded as temporary treatment plants.
The owner must provide all septic tanks as part of the owner’s infrastructure
works.
Septic tanks must be constructed to standard design in compliable with

MSIG Volume 5.
7.5.2 Single Developments Over 30 Units in Total With Average

Housing Density Greater Than Five Units per Hectare
For single developments over 30 units in total with an average housing

density greater than 25 persons per hectare, a sewer reticulation and a
communal treatment plant must be provided.
The treatment plant may be classified as permanent.
Sewer reticulation must be appropriately designed to achieve acceptable

hydraulic conditions within topographic and routing parameters.
7.5.3 Single Developments Over 30 Units in Total with Average

Housing Density Less Than Five Units per Hectare
For single developments over 30 units in total and with an average housing
density of less than 25 persons per hectare, a sewer reticulation and a
communal treatment plant is preferred.
The treatment plant may be classified as permanent.
Where the terrain of the development is such that if a communal system is

constructed it will require the construction of too many intermediate pump
stations, then individual treatment facilities may be considered, subject to
the following conditions:
i) The individual system must be a system approved by the

Commission.
ii) Where the ground conditions permit, soakaway trenches must be
used for disposal of the final effluent from the treatment systems.

iii) Developers shall ensure that home owners enter into an agreement
with the supplier of the systems or licensed contractors, to carry out
operation and maintenance of the system as per design requirements.
iv) Tanks shall be desludged by the Service Licensee as per terms of the
agreement signed between the Services Licensee and the
Commission.
v) The Commission and DOE may impose stringent conditions, if they
believe that such measures are required to ensure that the sewage
from the development will not result in an adverse impact on the
environment.
All septic tanks shall be designed in accordance with the requirements in

MSIG Volume 5.
7.6 Non-Compliance with Standards
7.6.1 Introduction
This section describes the types of incidents, which are outside the control
of the operator that may cause a sewage treatment plant to fail its effluent
consent. Generally, the more sophisticated the treatment process, the more a
process is at risk of failure from one of these incidents. It would be
unreasonable to expect the operator of the treatment plants to perform
within the effluent quality standards following such incidents. However,
the operator must always use his best endeavours to rectify the situation as
soon as practicable following such an incident.
The following potential incidents are treated as special cases when meeting
absolute compliance with Standard A or Standard B.
7.6.2 Types of Incident’s that Can Cause Treatment Plant Failure
(I) Power Interruption
An interruption in the power supply to a treatment plant will cause failure in

all mechanical treatment processes.
Some large treatment plants have emergency generators which can be

brought on stream to ensure inlet pumping continues.
However, the crude sewage will pass through the plant receiving only
rudimentary treatment and will probably fail to comply with Standard A
and Standard B.
Furthermore, all existing sewage treatment plants have to be restarted

manually once they are tripped through power failure.

Industry Guidelines
On new works, all treatment plants will be fitted with auto-restart facilities
for immediate resumption of operation when power is reconnected.
(II) Lightning
When buildings or cabinets housing electrical control equipment are struck

by lightning, fail safe surge protection equipment trips all mechanical
equipment.
This requires all the equipment to be reset and switched on again. On an

unmanned plant there will be a delay between the trip-out following the
lightning strike and the operators getting to the plant to reset the equipment.
During this period the plant may fail to comply with the relevant standards.
(III) Storm and Flood
During periods of very heavy rain, areas of the local sewer network may
suffer such ingress of storm water that surcharge of the sewer system will
result, causing abnormally large flows to arrive at the sewage treatment
plant inlet.
Under these conditions, the treatment plant would receive much higher
flows than that designed for and would suffer severe hydraulic overloading.
The effect would be a rapid wash through of sewage and solids causing the
works to fail to meet standards.
(IV) Major Mechanical Breakdown
In many existing sewage treatment plants, particularly the small ones,

insufficient standby equipment has been provided by the developer.
All new plants must be equipped with standby units having an automatic
change over system in the event of failure.
Existing plants may be out of action for several days while repairs are
carried out to failed equipment. To help alleviate this problem, the operator
needs to carry critical spare parts to help speed the repair process.
(V) Vandalism, Theft and Criminal Damage
If a treatment plant is subject to this form of interference, then the treatment

process is at risk until the necessary repairs are carried out.
Reasonable measures must be taken to deter vandalism.

(VI) Deliberate Discharge of Toxic Chemicals
From time to time, irresponsible industrialists may discharge chemical

waste to the sewer in contravention of all the relevant legislation.
This may occur as a one-off dumping exercise, or may be the result of a

small continuous discharge from a trade process which affects the
treatability of the sewage and causes the treatment plant to fail.
(VII) Accidental Discharge of Strong Loads or Toxic

Substances
From time to time, genuine accidents occur on industrial premises or on the

highway that result in abnormal discharges to the sewer. These may take the
form of serious fires at industrial premises, the sudden failure of large
storage tanks or a major traffic incident involving the transport of liquid
products.
Such discharges to the sewer system would almost always result in the
sewage treatment plant failing to comply until the effects of the discharge
have passed through the system.
(VIII) Major Blockages in the Sewer Network System
A blockage in the main sewer network system often causes the sewage to
build up behind the blockage and turn septic.
The sudden release of this large volume of septic sewage by the clearance
of the blockage, may cause temporary overloading of the treatment plant
and lead to a reduction in effluent quality beyond the absolute standard for a
short period of time.
(IX) Defect
Completed treatment plant to be inspected by competent personal and by

SSD. Visual inspection to be conducted during the final stage of
construction. Two type of defect generally detected during inspection :
a) Minor Defect
Non-critical, do not immediately or unduly affect the performance
of the plant but nevertheless, require attention to rectify faults within
reasonable time frame.
b) Major Defect
Critical or serious and require immediate action to be taken in
rectifying faults, impair plant performance, unit processes, or system
components.

Industry Guidelines
Consultant’s responsibility to ensure compliance of the design standard and

good engineering practice
7.7 Energy Saving
In selection of treatment process or equipment, the designer should consider

the best product which minimized the power consumption for process and
major plant equipment without compromising on the quality of treatment
discharge
7.8 Recycle and Reuse
a) To promote /encourage designer to look into potential of energy

reuse.
b) To utilize the recycle water (reclaim water) for cleaning and
landscaping purposes,
c) To promote and encourage design to identify potential of sludge
reuse and / or recycle.


Industry Guidelines
Section 8
Package Sewage
Treatment Plant
Package Sewage Treatment Plant
8.1 Definition
A package sewage treatment plant is a form of treatment plant both for fixed
film and suspended growth processes. It shall consist of a prefabricated
biological treatment system and be limited to the development of the sewage
treatment system between the ranges of 150 to 5,000 populations equivalent
(PE).
The package sewage treatment plant is only applicable to Class 1 and Class 2
STP as defined in Section 4 of this Guidelines. The prefabricated biological
treatment system shall have been given approval by the Commission prior to
the application.
The major components of a package sewage treatment plant are:
(I) Inlet works

a) Primary screen
b) Pump Station (if applicable)
c) Secondary screen
d) Grit and grease chambers.
(II) Biological treatment system

a) Balancing Tank
b) Aeration/Anoxic Tank
c) Clarifier
d) Sludge Holding Tank
e) Aeration System including blower house
f) Sludge Dewatering System
(III) Outlet works

a) Disinfection that can be physical, chemical or radiation.
Package sewage treatment plants fall under the category of covered/buried

treatment plants.
8.2 Land Area Requirement
The land area requirements for package sewage treatment plants shall
comply with those recommended for Class 1 and Class 2 Plants in Section 2
of this Guidelines.
The net area does not include the 10 m buffer zone surrounding each plant,
but does include the 5m set backs and access paths within the plant.

8.3 Design Requirement
a) All calculations regarding the inlet works, outlet works, biological

processes and hydraulics shall follow the design criteria as stipulated
in the Section 4 and Section 5 of this Guidelines.
b) All units of package sewage treatment plant and foundation shall be
designed to meet the extreme case scenario as follows:
• When the tanks are fully emptied;
• During high groundwater conditions.
c) The structural design of a tank shall consider all factors that can
affect the strength and integrity of the tank, like soil conditions, area
of installation, etc. All tanks shall be structurally designed to
withstand the maximum earth load and hydrostatic pressure
equivalent to a backfill depth of 1m.
d) All civil works of blower house, pump house and control panel room
shall be as recommended in Section 4 and 5 of this Guidelines.
e) The minimum design life span of the components of the package
sewage treatment plant shall be as Table 8.1 below:
Table 8.1: Minimum Design Life Span of Package Sewage

Treatment Plant Components
Component Design Life Span

Prefabricated tank and other structural
> 50 years
components
Civil > 50 years
Mechanical & Electrical 10 years
8.4 Components of Package Sewage Treatment Plant
8.4.1 Layout, Piping and Arrangement of Prefabricated Biological

Treatment System
The prefabricated biological treatment system shall be packaged in terms of

layout, piping, arrangement of the tanks and the biological processes.
The dimension of each tank shall be fixed for each model of the
prefabricated system. All these items shall not be changed once approved.

Treatment Plant
8.4.2 Prefabricated Tanks
The physical properties of the tanks for package plants shall meet the
material requirements for STP structures as stipulated in Section 4 of this
MSIG. The prefabricated tanks shall come as complete tanks, thus no
welding, jointing, fabrication/moulding of tanks’ components is allowed at
site. The route for delivery of tanks shall be planned properly, so as not to
cause any damage to road facilities and harm to road users.
8.4.3 Process Treatment Units/Components
The following table provides the recommended number of tanks for each
unit process against the P.E size. The effective volume consideration is also
incorporated in the table.
Table 8.2: Recommended Number of Tanks and Effective Volume

Consideration for Various Unit Processes
Max Number of Effective Volume

Name of Tank Tanks (m3) Name of Tank
≤ 1,000 > 1,000
Balancing 1 2
Tank
Aeration Tank 2 4
Anoxic Tank 2 4
Clarifier 2 4
Sludge 2 4
Holding Tank

Note: Low water level (LWL) is the minimum submergence level of the pumps to
protect it from damage. It is dependent on the type of the pumps, thus the
low water level shall be set according to the pump’s manufacturers
requirement Top Water Level (TWL) is the normal operating water level
with adequate freeboard provided.
8.5 Appurtenances
8.5.1 Piping system
8.5.1.1 General
a) The piping used shall be an approved product, supplied and

manufactured by a supplier/manufacturer approved by the
Commission and shall be suitable for the application.
b) The arrangement of the piping system and interconnection pipes in
the tanks shall not obstruct maintenance work of the equipment in the
tanks.
c) All the buried piping shall be properly bedded and supported with the
selected compacted fill material.
d) All the above ground piping shall have a minimum distance of 75
mm from the ground level.
e) It shall be provided with a proper pipe support and bracket. The
bracket shall be made of hot dipped galvanised steel.
f) The arrangement/layout of the above ground piping shall minimise
obstruction and maneuverability.
g) Any installation or assemblies of pipe support that is attached to the
prefabricated tank is not allowed.
8.5.1.2 Inlet and Outlet Pipes
All inlet and outlet pipes of the units of prefabricated biological treatment
system must be pre-fitted at the factory. On-site drilling for holes is strictly
prohibited. All jointing and pipe holes connection shall be factory
fabricated/moulded.
8.5.1.3 Aeration Pipes
a) The air distribution pipe used shall be rigid and can withstand
temperatures up to 150 ºC and pressures of 25% more than the design
pressure of the blower.
b) The air pipe from the blower to the process unit shall be above
ground.

Treatment Plant
8.5.1.4 Sludge Transfer Pipes
a) No thread union/coupling is allowed at the sludge transfer pump

piping. The connection shall be double flange with Grade 304
stainless steel bolt & nut.
b) No bending is allowed for the sewage distribution pipe. A chamber
shall be provided for any changing direction of the flow.
8.5.1.5 Effluent Pipes
The effluent discharge piping system that passes through / by-passes the
disinfection treatment facility shall be designed so as not to cause any
nuisance.
8.5.2 Pumping System
The pumps installed in the package system shall meet the requirements as
stated in Table 8.3 below:
Table 8.3 – Technical Requirements of Pumping System
Sludge Transfer
Name of Pump Transfer Pump RAS/WAS Pump
Pump
Sludge Holding
Application Area Balancing Tank Clarifier
Tank
Minimum Throughlet 50 mm 50 mm 50 mm
Automatic control
Automatic control Manual control
Control by timer and
by float switch by timer
solenoid valve
1 duty for each
Number of Pump 1 duty, 1 standby 1 duty for each tank
tank
Mechanical PE < 1000 : Air lift
Mechanical
Submersible
Type of Pump Submersible
Pump or Self PE ≥ 1000 :
Pump Mechanical Pump
Priming Pump
Necessities Mandatory
All pumps shall be completely installed with duct foot, guide
Accessories
rail and lifting chain made of Grade 304 stainless steel.
Note: 1. Non-submersible pumps shall be provided with parking bay with
shade.

2. The duct foot shall be installed and assembled at the factory. No

installation/assemblies at site are allowed except for the connection
of the transfer pipe and the guide rail. All fasteners of the duct foot
shall be water-tight.
8.5.3 Diffuser
a) All diffusers must be supported from the tank base. A typical

drawing of the diffuser support is shown in Figure 8.1.
b) The diffuser shall not be bolted to the bottom of the tank.
c) The diffuser shall be removable and easy to re-install.
8.5.4 Flow Distribution Chamber
a) Distribution box shall be provided with adjustable features. A typical

drawing of the distribution box is shown in Figure 8.2.
b) The design and construction of the distribution chamber shall prevent
any sedimentation.
8.5.5 Manhole Cover/Inspection Chamber Cover
The manhole cover shall follow the requirements as in Table 8.4:
Table 8.4 - Technical Requirements of Manhole Cover
Description FRP HDPE Ductile/Cast Iron

Size 600mm x 600mm or 600mm diameter
Installation At any location on top of the tank except at assembly
joints, rib or reinforced ring location.
Load Bearing Capacity ≥ 3.5 kN/m2 (BS EN 12255-1:2002(E))
Maximum Deflection 10mm or the span divided by 200, whichever is smaller
Limit (BS EN 12255-1:2002(E))
Class B 125 in accordance to BS EN 124:1994 or equivalent
Personnel Load 125 kN (fully walk-able) (BS EN 124:1994)
Design Safety Factor 4:1 for allowable stresses shall be met for all load
combinations (ANSI/ASCE 7-98)
Table 8.4 - Technical Requirements of Manhole Cover (Con’t)
Description FRP HDPE Ductile/Cast Iron

Treatment Plant
Temperature Range 27°C – 35°C (to incorporate thermal expansion and

contraction)
Standard colour Black Black Black
Coating Aliphatic acrylic - Epoxy coating of
polyurethane xx µm
non-skid coating NA
- Hot dip galvanised
of 200 µm
Resin Corrosion
resistant general
NA NA
purpose
polyester
UV Protection Ultraviolet-light
inhibitors shall
Carbon black NA
be added to the
laminate
Note: 1. The collar of the manhole shall be raised with a minimum height of
100mm above ground level.
2. The cover shall be equipped with a frame support and hinge, and
attached to the manhole opening.
3. Each manhole cover must be properly labeled / marked for ease of
identification of the unit process of the system.
4. NA – not applicable
8.5.6 Anchor System Loading
The tank anchor system (straps, cables, turnbuckles, etc.) shall have strength
of at least 1.5 times the maximum uplift force of an empty tank without
backfill in place. All wire straps, cables and turnbuckles must be made of
Grade 304 stainless steel.
8.5.7 Landscaping
The landscaping of the sewage package system shall be in accordance with

those recommended in Section 6 of this Guidelines.
8.5.8 Odour Treatment
The odour treatment shall be incorporated into the package sewage treatment
plant and shall follow the requirements stipulated in Section 7.4.

8.5.9 Ancillary Facilities
The requirement and criteria of other ancillaries such as lifting facilities,

road, water tank, stand pipe, etc shall be in accordance with the design
criteria as stipulated in Section 6 and special requirements in Section 7.4.
8.6 Marking and Labelling
Each tank shall at a minimum be marked with the following information:

• Manufacture’s name or trademark
• Manufacturing serial number
• Manufacturing date (MM/YY)
• Diameter and Capacity
• Citation of the standard
The markings shall be printed and adhered to the tank.

Treatment Plant
Appendix A
Tables
Appendix A
Appendix A Tables
Table A.1 Contaminants of Concern in Sewage Treatment
Table A.2 Typical Composition of Untreated Domestic Sewage
Table A.3 Major Biological Treatment Processes Used for Sewage Treatment
Table A.4 Interim National River Water Quality Standards for Malaysia
Table A.5 River Clarification
Table A.6 The Occupational Safety and Health Act 514, 1994 – Brief Summary
Table A.7 Permissible limits for potentially toxic elements in soil
Table A.8 Options for disposal of Sludge and reuse of biosolids

Appendix A - Tables
Table A.1 Contaminants of Concern in Sewage Treatment
Contaminants Reason for Concern

Suspended solids Suspended solids can lead to the development of
sludge deposits and anaerobic conditions when
untreated sewage is discharged in the aquatic
environment.
Biodegradable Composed principally of proteins, carbohydrates
organics and fats, biodegradable organics are measured
most commonly in terms of BOD (biochemical
oxygen demand). If discharged untreated to the
environment, their biological stabilisation can lead
to the depletion of natural oxygen resources and to
the development of septic conditions.
Pathogens Communicable diseases can be transmitted by the
pathogenic organisms in sewage.
Nutrients Both nitrogen and phosphorus, along with carbon,
are essential nutrients for growth. When
discharged to the aquatic environment, these
nutrients can lead to the growth of undesirable
aquatic life. When discharged in excessive
amounts on land, they can also lead to the
pollution of groundwater.
Refractory These organics tend to resist conventional methods
organics of sewage treatment. Typical examples include
surfactants, phenols and agricultural pesticides.
Heavy metals Heavy metals are usually added to sewage from
commercial and industrial activities and may have
to be removed if the sewage is to be reused.
Dissolved Inorganic constituents such as calcium, sodium
inorganic solids and sulphate are added to the original domestic
water supply as a result of water use and may have
to be removed if the sewage is to be reused.

Treatment Plant
Appendix A - Tables
Table A.2 Typical Composition of Untreated Domestic Sewage
Constituent Concentration (mg/l)

Strong Medium Weak
Solids, total 1,200 720 350
Dissolved, total 850 500 250
Fixed 525 300 145
Volatile 325 200 105
Suspended, total 350 220 100
Fixed 75 55 20
Volatile 275 165 80
Settleable solids, ml/l 20* 10* 5*
Biochemical oxygen demand, 400 250 110
5-day, 20°C (BOD5, 20°C)
Total organic carbon (TOC) 290 160 80
Chemical oxygen demand (COD) 1,000 500 250
Nitrogen (total as N) 85 40 20
Organic 35 15 8
Free ammonia 50 25 12
Nitrites 0 0 0
Nitrates 0 0 0
Phosphorus (total as P) 15 8 4
Organic 5 3 1
Inorganic 10 5 3
Chlorides 100 50 30
Alkalinity (as CaCO3) 200 100 50
Grease 150 100 50
* All values except settleable solids are expressed in mg/l.

Appendix A - Tables
Table A.3 Major Biological Treatment Processes Used for Sewage

Treatment
Type Common Name Use

Aerobic processes
Suspended Activated-sludge process Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
growth
Conventional (plug flow) Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Continuous-flow stirred-tank Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Step aeration Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Pure oxygen Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Modified aeration Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Contract stabilisation Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Extended aeration Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Oxidation ditch Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Sequencing batch reactor Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Suspended-growth nitrification Nitrification
Aerated lagoons Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Aerobic digestion Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Conventional air Stabilisation, carbonaceous BOD removal
Pure oxygen Stabilisation, carbonaceous BOD removal
High-rate aerobic algal pond Carbonaceous BOD removal
Attached Trickling filters
growth
Low-rate Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
High-rate Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Roughing filters Carbonaceous BOD removal
Rotating biological contactors Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Packed-bed reactors Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Combined Trickling filter, activated sludge Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
processes
Activated sludge, trickling filter Carbonaceous BOD removal (nitrification)
Anoxic processes
Suspended Suspended-growth denitrification Denitrification
growth
Attached Fixed-film denitrification Denitrification
growth
continued

Treatment Plant
Appendix A - Tables
Table A.3 (continued)
Type Common Name Use

Anaerobic processes
Suspended Anaerobic digestion Stabilisation, carbonaceous BOD removal
growth
Standard-rate, single-stage Stabilisation, carbonaceous BOD removal
High-rate, single-stage Stabilisation, carbonaceous BOD removal
Two-stage Stabilisation, carbonaceous BOD removal
Anaerobic contact process Carbonaceous BOD removal
Attached Anaerobic filter Carbonaceous BOD removal, stabilisation
growth (denitrification)
Anaerobic lagoons (ponds) Carbonaceous BOD removal (stabilisation)
Aerobic/anoxic or anaerobic process
Suspended Single-stage nitrification- Carbonaceous BOD removal, nitrification,
growth denitrification denitrification
Nitrification-denitrification Nitrification, denitrification
Attached Facultative lagoons (ponds) Carbonaceous BOD removal
growth
Combined Maturation or tertiary ponds Carbonaceous BOD removal
processes
Anaerobic-facultative lagoons Carbonaceous BOD removal
Anaerobic-facultative-aerobic Carbonaceous BOD removal
lagoons

Appendix A - Tables
Table A.4 Interim National River Water Quality Standards for Malaysia
Parameters (units) Classes*

I IIA IIB III IV V
Ammoniacal Nitrogen 0.1 0.3 0.3 0.9 2.7 >2.7
(mg/l)
BOD5 (mg/l) 1 3 3 6 12 >12
COD (mg/l) 10 25 25 50 100 >100

DO (mg/l) 7 5-7 5-7 3-5 <3 <1
PH 6.5-8.5 6-9 6-9 5-9 5-9 -
Colour (TCU) 15 150 150 - - -
Elect. Cond.# 1,000 1,000 - - 6,000 -
(mmhos/cm)
Floatables N N N - - -
Odour N N N - -
Salinity# (0/00) 0.5 1 - - 2
Taste N N N - -
Total Diss. Solid# 500 1,000 - - 4,000
(mg/l)
Total SS (mg/l) 25 50 50 150 300 >300
Temperature (0C) - Normal - Normal - -
±2 ±2
Turbidity (NTU) 5 50 50 - - -
F. Colif. †(counts/100 10 100 400 5,000 5,000 -
ml)
Tot. Colif. (counts/100 100 5,000 5,000 (20,000)‡ (20,000)‡ > 50,000
ml)
50,000 50,000
N No visible floatable materials/debris, or no objectionable odour,

or no objectionable taste
* Classes are described on the following table
#
Related parameters, only one recommended for use
†
Geometric mean
‡
Maximum not to be exceeded

Treatment Plant
Appendix A - Tables
Table A.5 River Clarification
Class Uses
I ♦ Conservation of natural environment
♦ Water supply I - practically no treatment necessary
(except by disinfection or boiling only)
♦ Fishery I - very sensitive aquatic species
IIA ♦ Water supply II - conventional treatment required
♦ Fishery II - sensitive aquatic species
IIB Recreational use with body contact
III ♦ Water supply III - extensive treatment required
♦ Fishery II - common, of economic value, and tolerant
species
♦ Livestock drinking
IV Irrigation
V None of the above
Note: This data is adapted from the Water Quality Criteria and Standards
for Malaysia, Final Report July 1986, Department of Environment.

Appendix A - Tables
Table A.6 The Occupational Safety and Health Act 514, 1994 -
Brief Summary of Contents
Part No. Content

I Preliminary
II Appointment of Offices
III National Council for Occupational Safety and Health
IV General Duties of Employers and Self Employed Persons
V General Duties of Designers, Manufacturers and Suppliers
VI General Duties of Employees
VII Safety and Health Organisations
VIII Notification of Accidents, Dangerous Occurrence, Occupational
Poisoning and Occupational Diseases, and Inquiry
IX Prohibition Against use of Plant or Substance
X Industry Codes of Practice
XI Enforcement and Investigation
XII Liability for Offences
XIII Appeals
XIV Regulations
XV Miscellaneous
The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) was enacted by the
Parliament in 1994. In general, it is an enabling law in that the duties,
responsibilities, penalties and guidelines are to be followed by each
specific industry. The following table provides an outline of OSHA.
Parts of OSHA have a specific target audience. For example, if the

professional is a designer, then Part V would be applicable with respect to
Occupational, Safety and Health in their design.

Treatment Plant
Appendix A - Tables
Table A.7 Permissible limits for potentially toxic elements in

soil
Parameters Limits (mg/kg)
Zinc 900
Copper 250
Nickel 150
Cadmium 12
Lead 1000
Mercury 4
Chromium 1000
Arsenic 150

Appendix A - Tables
Table A.8 Options for disposal of Sludge and reuse of biosolids
Option for
No Type of sludge/ by-product Source/Treatment Process Disposal or
Utilization
1 Liquid primary sludge and - Imhoff tanks D
septage - Primary and secondary
clarifiers
- Septic Tanks
2 Dewatered primary sludge - Drying beds C, D, I, S
and dewatered septage - Mechanical dewatering
equipment
3 Pond sludge - Oxidation ponds D, F, R
- Aerated lagoons
- Waste stabilization
ponds
4 Dewatered pond sludge - Drying beds C, D, F, I, R, S
- Mechanical dewatering
5 Digested sludge - Digesters D, F, R
- Sludge lagoons
- Anaerobic ponds
6 Dewatered digested sludge - Drying beds C, D, F, I, R, S
- Mechanical dewatering
7 Lime stabilised sludge - Lime stabilisation C, D, F, R, S
8 Compost product - Composting A, C, D, F, L, R, S
9 Thermally dried sludge - Thermal drying A, C, D, F, L, R, S,
(pellets/granules) SP
10 Incinerator ash - Incineration C, D, S, SP
NOTES:
A = Use in agriculture
C = Disposal to controlled dumpsites
D = Disposal to dedicated sludge disposal sites
F = Use in forestry/non-food crops
I = Incinerate
L = Use for landscaping at public amenity areas
S = Disposal to sanitary landfill sites
R = Use in rehabilitation of degraded
SP = Recycled into special product, e.g. building material

Treatment Plant
Appendix B
References
Malaysian Standard
Malaysian Standards
♦ MS 29
Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete
♦ MS 144
Specification for cold reduced mild steel wire for reinforcement of concrete
♦ MS 145
Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
♦ MS 146
Specification for hot rolled steel bars for reinforcement of concrete
♦ MS 416
Code of practice for the use of structural steel in building
♦ MS 523
Specification for concrete including ready mixed concrete
Part 1 Guide to specifying concrete
Part 2 Methods for specifying concrete mixes
Part 3 Procedures to be used in producing and transporting concrete
Part 4 Procedures to be used in sampling, testing and assessing compliance of
concrete
♦ MS 739
Specification for hot-dip galvanised coatings on threaded fasteners
♦ MS 740
Specification for hot-dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
♦ MS 822
Specification for sawn-timber foundation piles
♦ MS 1037
Specification for sulphate resisting portland cement
♦ MS 1195
Code of practice for structural use of concrete
Part 1 Design and construction
Part 2 Special circumstances
Part 3 Design charts for singly reinforced, doubly reinforced beams and
rectangular columns
♦ MS 1227
Specification for portland pulverised fuel ash cement
♦ MS 1228: 1991
Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Sewerage Systems

Malaysian Standard
♦ MS 1241
Specification for fibreglass water tanks - effective capacity of less than 2000 litres
♦ MS 1292
Specification for rubber seals – water stops for sealing joints in concrete
♦ MS 1387
Specification for ground granulated blast furnace slag for use with portland cement
♦ MS 1390
Specification for glass-reinforced polyester panels and panel water tanks
British Standards
♦ BS 476
Fire tests on building materials and structures
♦ BS 1161
Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes
♦ BS 1615
Specifications for anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium.
♦ BS 3396
Woven glass fibre fabrics for plastics reinforcement
♦ BS 3532
Method of specifying unsaturated polyester resin systems
♦ BS 3749
Specification for E glass fibre woven roving fabrics for the reinforcement of polyester
and epoxy resin systems
♦ BS 4248
Specification for supersulfated cement
♦ BS 4848
Hot rolled structural steel sections
Part 2 Specification for hot finished hollow sections
♦ BS 4921
Specification for sherardized coatings on iron and steel
♦ BS 5493
Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion

Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Standard
♦ BS 7079
Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products
♦ BS 7123
Specification for metal arc welding of steel and concrete reinforcement
♦ BS 8118
Structural use of aluminium
Part 1 Code of practice for design
Part 2 Specification for materials, workmanship and protection
European Standard
♦ EN 10088
Stainless Steel
Part 1 List of Stainless Steels
Part 3 Technical delivery conditions for semi-finished products, bars, rods,
wire, sections and bright products of corrosion resisting steels for general
purposes
♦ EN 10029
Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates 3
mm thick or above
♦ EN ISO 9445
Continuously cold-rolled stainless steel narrow strip, wide strip, plate/sheet and cut
lengths. Tolerances on dimensions and form
♦ EN 754
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Cold drawn rod/bar and tube.
Part 1 Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
Part 2 Mechanical properties
Part 7 Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
Part 8 Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
♦ EN 755
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles.
Part 1 Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
Part 2 Mechanical properties
Part 3 Round bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Part 4 Square bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Part 5 Rectangular bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Part 6 Hexagonal bars, tolerances on dimensions and form
Part 7 Seamless tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form
Part 8 Porthole tubes, tolerances on dimensions and form

Malaysian Standard
Part 9 Profile, tolerances on dimensions and form

♦ EN 1676
Specifications for aluminium and aluminium alloy. Alloyed ingots for remelting.
♦ EN 12373
Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodizing.
Part 1 Method for specifying decorative and protective anodic oxidation
coatings on aluminium and its alloys.
♦ EN 10162
Specification for cold rolled steel sections. Technical delivery conditions. Dimensional
and cross-sectional tolerances.
♦ EN 13923
Filament-wound FRP pressure vessels. Materials, design, manufacturing and testing.
♦ EN ISO 8503
Preparation of steel substrates before applications of paints and related products.
Surface roughness characteristics of blast-cleaned steel substrates.
Part 1 Specifications and definitions for ISO surface profile comparators for the
assessment of abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces.
♦ EN 10025
Hot rolled products of structural steels.
Part 1 General technical delivery conditions.
Part 3 Technical delivery conditions for normalized/normalized rolled weldable
fine grain structural steels.
Part 4 Technical delivery conditions for thermomechanical rolled weldable fine
grain structural steels
♦ EN ISO 2063
Thermal spraying. Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Zinc, aluminium and their
alloys.
♦ EN 14020
Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass roving.
Part 1 Designation
Part 2 Methods of test and general requirements
Part 3 Specific requirements
♦ EN 10210
Specification for hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain
steels
Part 2 Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties.

Industry Guidelines
Malaysian Standard
♦ EN 10296
Welded circular steel tube for mechanical and general engineering purposes. Technical
delivery conditions.
Part 1 Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes.
Part 2 Stainless steel
♦ EN 10297
Seamless circular steel tubes for mechanical and general engineering purposes.
Technical delivery conditions.
Part 1 Non-alloy and alloy steel tubes.
♦ EN 10305
Steel tubes for precision applications. Technical delivery conditions.
Part 1 Seamless cold drawn tubes
Part 2 Welded cold drawn tubes
Part 3 Welded cold sized tubes
Part 4 Seamless cold drawn tubes for hydraulic and pneumatic power systems
Part 5 Welded and cold sized square and rectangular
Part 6 Welded cold drawn tubes for hydraulic and pneumatic power systems
♦ EN 14118
Reinforcements. Specification for textile glass mats. (chopped strand and continuous
filament mats).
Part 1 Designation
Part 2 Methods of tests and general requirements
Part 3 Specific requirements
♦ EN 10083
Specification for steels for quenching and tempering
Part 3 Technical delivery conditions for alloy steels
ASTM Standard
♦ ASTM D4097
Standard specification for contact-moulded glass-fibre-reinforced thermo set resin
corrosion-resistant tanks.
♦ ASTM E84
Standard test method for surface burning characteristics of building materials.
♦ ASTM C582
Standard specification for contact-moulded reinforced thermosetting Plastic (RTP)
laminates for corrosion-resistant equipment.

Malaysian Standard
AS Standard
♦ AS 3750.2
Paints for steel structures – Ultra high-build paint
♦ AS/NZS 3750.12
Paints for steel structures – Alkyd/micaceous iron oxide
♦ AS/NZS 2312
Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by the use of
protective coatings.
Other Reference Materials
♦ Buffer Guidelines for the Siting and Zoning of Industries, Department of

Environment
♦ Environmental Quality Act 1974
♦ Environmental Quality (Sewage and Industrial Effluents) Regulations, 1979
♦ Occupational Safety and Health Act, 1994 (OSHA)
♦ Water Quality Criteria and Standards for Malaysia, Final Report, July 1986,
Department of Environment
♦ Environmental Impact Assessment Guidelines for Municipal Solid Waste,
Sewage Treatment and Disposal Projects, Department of Environment.
♦ Factories and Machinery Act 1967 (Revised – 1974)
♦ Uniform Building By-Law (UBBL), 1984
♦ Town and Country Planning Act, 1976
♦ Sewerage Services Act 1993
♦ Water Services Industry Act 2006
♦ Electrical Act
Other Guidelines in This Set
The Guidelines for Developers is comprised of 5 volumes:
♦ Volume 1 Sewerage Policy for New Developments

♦ Volume 2 Sewerage Works Procedures
♦ Volume 3 Sewer Networks and Pump Stations
♦ Volume 5 Septic Tanks

Industry Guidelines
Appendix C
Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition System (SCADA)
Appendix C - Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA)
C-1 Introduction: Overview

SCADA is the acronym for Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition, SCADA or Human-
Machine Interface (HMI). The system allows distributed input to be continuously monitored
without the intervention of an operator and allows supervisor or operator (depending on security
level) to remotely control of equipment operating status.
Data acquisition begins at the Programming Logic Controller, PLC level and includes meter
readings and equipment statuses that are communicated to the SCADA as required. Data is then
compiled and formatted in such a way that a control room operator using the HMI can make
appropriate supervisory decisions that may be required to over-ride normal PLC controls. (A
SCADA system includes all the pieces, HMI, controllers, I/O devices, networks, software, etc.).
SCADA systems typically implement a distributed database which contains data elements called
tag points. A tag point represents a single input or output value monitored or controlled by the
system. Tag points can be either "hard" or "soft". A hard point is representative of an actual
input or output connected to the system, while a soft point represents the result of logic and
math operations applied to other hard and soft points. The point values are normally stored as
value-timestamp combinations; the value and the timestamp when the value was recorded or
calculated. A series of value-timestamp combinations is the history of that point.
The SCADA provides a user-friendly front-end to a control system containing programmable

logic controller (PLC) that provide automated, pre-programmed control over a process. This
enables the SCADA system to gather data automatically and remotely rather than manually and
site in-situ.
A SCADA software can be linked to a database (normally SQL-Structured Query Language), to

provide instant trending, diagnostic data, scheduled maintenance procedures, logistic
information, detailed schematics for a particular sensor or machine, and expert-system
troubleshooting guides. Most major PLC manufacturers have offered integrated HMI/SCADA
systems, many of them using open and non-proprietary communications protocols (such as
MODBUS or Profibus).
In short, interfacing on of SCADA with PLC offers efficient monitoring and control of process
in a large installation site and with large number of distributed equipment at a site. SCADA
provide alarm notification, historical and on-line trending plots of control parameters for
effective process monitoring and control. SCADA system can also be implemented with PPM
schedule maintenance notification and reminder.
The SCADA that are installed at the remote sites can be linked to a Master Station via
communication system (Radio frequency or WIFI or other on-line communication channels).
The data from an equipment is collected via on-line data acquisition or, unless otherwise
allowed, on batch mode via data logging devices.
The SCADA software can also activate alarm messaging to inform the operator station for
exceptional event (critical alarm) reporting. Remote Access Server (RAS) features can provide
for either via Internet or other dial-up method (fixed line and/or wireless modem).
All the proposed SCADA software shall be scalable and flexible enough to allow the integration
of any additional SCADA controller in future expansion. It shall provide with many industrial
standard protocols to allow the user to integrate easily.

C-2 Purpose
This document will provide basic technical requirement for implementation of integrated
SCADA/HMI in sewerage system.
C-3 General Requirements

The SCADA system shall be scalable process control solutions designed to meet the required
automation needs in the sewerage industries. The system shall provide the required level of
performance, flexibility, ease of use, and low life-cycle cost of ownership, making use of the
following technology that includes:
The SCADA system shall be Window based client/server system and make use of the following
technologies: -
• Dynamic data caching, alarming, human machine interface, history collection, and
reporting functions;
• Web viewable, providing secure, advanced user interface HMI capabilities based on an
open industry standard html file format and Web Browser access;
• Extensive list of communication interfaces;
• Secure Internet Browser based on-line documentation and support.
C-4 Architecture
The SCADA architecture shall be flexible and scalable to allow expansion requirements. The
basic architecture shall incorporate all but not limited to the followings:
• Standard based workstations;

• powerful Windows based server(s);
• Windows based clients;
• Industry communication standards shall follow IEEE specification;
• object-based configuration tools;
• controllers/remote terminal units;
• with power surge protection;
• Modem: digital or analog;
• Network switches or routers;
• Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS);
• data logger & storage devices for continuous monitoring of operation in the event of
cessation of communication;
C-5 SCADA Requirement

The SCADA shall utilize all but not limited to the followings available technologies and
features:
• HMI Web – A web-based architecture that allows HMI and application data which
uses HTML display format to provide casual access of process graphic displays.

Industry Guidelines
• Real-time Database – a true Client/Server architecture where a real-time database

on the server provides data to a number of client applications including:
o Operator stations
o Microsoft office applications (such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft
Access)
o Internet explorer
• Open Systems – incorporates open technologies and standards including SQL,
ODBC, DDE, Visual Basic, and other OLE for process control.
• Infrastructure – in cooperate alarm/event management system; configure reports,
history collection and a variety of standard system trends.
• On-line documentation – provides users access to system information and
documentation.
• Interfaces – Data acquisition ability from a wide variety of remote terminal units
and controllers.
Other powerful supervisory control features include:
• Integrated detail displays, custom graphics, alarms, history, and reports

• Standard control functions
• Operator security
• Redundant Windows XP/server operation
• A common interface for SCADA and other control types such as Hybrid Control
• Database and diagnostic integration with process and discrete controllers
• Graphical building tools
• Standard and user-definable application templates
• International system and local language support
• Optional applications such as Alarm Pager interface, Downtime Analysis, and
statistical Process Quality Control
Standard facilities shall include but not limited to the followings:
• Windows based HMI

Multiple local and remote operator stations
Interface: TCP/IP, fieldbus, Modbus, Hart
• Support for redundant controller/RTU communications
Integration of multiple systems
Real-time data access for a wide variety of process connected devices
• Supervisory data acquisition and control of controllers and remote terminal units
• alarm management
• Extensive historian and trending
• Flexible standard or customized reports
• Optional Live Video Capture integration
• Industry standard local and wide area network integration
• Secure data integration with third party applications
• ActiveX Document and Scripting support
C-6 Operator Interface Station

The operator interface station shall allow object based graphics to provide the HMI for the user
with object concern. The system shall employ industry de-factor standards, such as Microsoft

Windows, HTML and the Internet so as to minimize operator training due to familiarity of
operating environment.
Critical information is conveyed using dedicated enunciators for alarms, controller

communication failures, operator/controller messages and equipment downtime conditions. A
dedicated alarm line shows the most recent (or oldest) highest priority, unacknowledged alarm
at all times.
Software system displays shall include but not limited to the followings: -
• Menu/navigation displays
• Alarm summary
• Event summary
• Trends
• Operating groups
• System status displays
• Configuration displays
• Loop Tuning displays
• Diagnostic and maintenance displays
• Hierarchy displays;
• Summary displays;
• Multiple log in with independent displays.
Optional Live Video integration shall provide remote viewing and viewing control features.
Security software feature shall provide restricted access, no access and full access (plant
management).
Network access shall permit authorized operator stations on a network to share a preconfigured
number of connections to the system. This allows a number of users on a network to access
production data on off-line basis.
C-7 Database
The SCADA software shall but not limited to the following real-time database:
• Analog configuration parameters
• Digital configuration parameters
• Accumulator configuration parameters
• User defined configuration parameters
Each point in the database has a number of associated configurable parameters, all of which can
be referenced relative to a single 'tag name'.
SCADA shall maintain the real time database that requires frequent high-speed access as
memory resident information and other less frequently accessed data as disk resident data.
Memory resident data is logged to data storage device every specified time frame defined by the
administrator to minimize the loss of data in the event of loss of power.

Industry Guidelines
C-8 Alarm/Event Management

The SCADA software System shall provide comprehensive alarm and event detection,
management, and reporting facilities. Alarm presentation of alarm / event management shall
include but not limited to the followings:
• Multiple alarm priorities

• Dedicated alarm zone
• Configurable alarm priority colors
• Associated display
• Audible alarms
• Alarm cutout
• Area assignment
• Operator log
• Hierarchical alarming
• Alarm/event reporting
• Alarm/communication/ message/downtime annunciator
• Alarm priority escalation
The standard Alarm Summary display shall allow operators to focus on the problem at hand by
supporting filters. Alarms may be filtered by:
• Area or location or unit processes

• Acknowledge Status
• Priority
Colors for the various priority levels of alarms can be configured by the user for display
purposes in the Alarm Summary and on custom graphics. The recommended color codes are
provided in Appendix 1. The software shall support configuration of alarm priority colors and
display on all process graphic displays to enables operators immediately determine critically of
the alarm.
The alarm shall annunciate in the status zone blinks with the color of the highest priority for
unacknowledged alarm. The alarms configuration shall consist but not limited to the followings:
• SPV Hi
• SPV Lo
• Transmitter Hi
• Transmitter Lo
• Trip
• Time out
With each of the configured alarms assigns a priority ranging from "Attention" - acknowledge
of non-critical alarm that required maintenance attention, "Responsive" - action required with
predefined period, "Urgent" - action required immediately.
The Alarm/Event summary shall list but not limited to the followings:
• Alarms
• Alarm Acknowledgments
• Return to normal
• Operator Control Actions
• Operator Login & Security Level Changes

• On-line Database Modifications

• Communications Alarms
• System Restart Messages
C-9 Historian
Historical trend shall provide wide range of sampling frequencies in both data-point and average
formats. The history trend intervals are shall be able to but not limited to the following displays:
• second data-point of pre-defined scale
• minute data-point of pre-defined scale
• hour data-point of pre-defined scale
• minute-average of pre-defined scale
• hour-average of pre-defined scale
• day-average of pre-defined scale
• Month-average of pre-defined scale
The historical data is to be display in various formats describe herewith:

• Graphical trend plot displays (average, max, min, and other statically format)
• Tabulation displays (average, max, min, and other statically format)
• Query databases of selected parameters.
C-10 Graphical Trending

Graphical trending configuration shall be able to configure by selecting the parameters to be
plot and its time-scales. Minimum trend types shall include but not limited to the followings:
• Single and Multi bar graphs (selectable scales)
• Single and Multi-line trends plot (selectable scales)
• Multi-range trends plot (selectable scales)
• X-Y line and scatter trend plots (selectable scales)
• Mathematical plots (logarithm scale, moving average, etc)
Functions provided for analyzing and manipulating data include:
• Combination real-time/historical plots

• zooming, panning, and scrolling
• Configurable trend density
• Saving of trend plot and export to various format (*.xls, HTML, XLM, etc)
• clipboard copy/paste enable
• Active button click.
C-11 Report Format

The software shall provide but not limited to the following report formats:
• Alarm/Event Log reports - selectable time frame, filterable events and alarms to enable
traceability of alarm.

Industry Guidelines
• Exportable Excel / Access format - able to save selected data/report format to Microsoft
Excel/Access format.
• Statistical data analysis format - generates reports of selectable statistical functions such
as Max/Min and standard deviation.
• Point Attribute Log - displaying specific attributes selectable from a list.
Reports should be generated as required time frame (interval), event-driven, or on-demand

basis. Report may be directed to screen, printer, file, or directly to another computer for analysis
or viewing electronically.
C-12 Security
The SCADA software shall provide configurable security levels, control levels and area
assignments. These may be configured for each individual operator or alternatively for each
operator station. The security levels shall be able to configure the following security levels:
Level 1: Sign-on for View mode only

Level 2: View only mode with alarm acknowledge
Level 3: Level 2 plus control of field parameters
Level 4: Level 3 plus field parameters of level 4, configure standard system
infrastructure such as reports
Level 5: Level 4 plus user configured field parameters
Level 6: Unlimited access
Operator sign-on/sign-off shall be logged. Any actions initiated by an operator are logged in the
Event database with the operator identifier. In addition any control actions to a given point is
only allowed if the control level configured in the operator profile exceeds the level assigned to
the point.
Logon password shall not be less than 6 alphanumeric characters and shall be encrypted.
Operators may change own passwords; however, new password shall not be the same as the last
10 passwords used in the previous 3 months. Three unsuccessful attempts of logon shall lock the
operator out for a lock-out period. Once logged on, an operator can log off at any time or will be
automatically signed off after a defined period of inactivity.
Area assignments limit operator access to graphics, alarms and point data to assigned areas,
providing effective plant partitioning. Individual operator profiles, including security levels,
control levels and area assignments, are activated when operators sign on to the system. In
addition, area profiles can be created enabling plant areas to be enabled or disabled for control,
between certain time and date criteria.
C-13 Scripting
The software shall have the VB or VBA scripting language enable to allow user to create script
that will run when a display is active or scripts can also be attached to server objects like point
parameters, alarm events, report completion and other events.

C-14 Interfaces
SCADA software provides Data Acquisition and Control facilities to communicate with a wide
range of controllers and Remote Terminal Units (RTUs). The controllers connection type shall
comply with the following communication protocol:
Serial / TCP/IP / ControlNet / Modbus+ / ASCII / TCP/IP / Ethernet
Data Acquisition –supports acquisition of data using either:

Periodic Scanning
C-15 Distributed Server Architecture

Distributed Server Architecture is integrated processes when there are multiple control stations,
or for segmenting control across units, providing the ultimate flexibility for both operations and
control. Distributed Server Architecture also provides the maximum flexibility for
geographically distributed sites.
C-16 Web Server

SCADA software shall provide Web Server capability to provide integration mechanism for
plant-centric operational information. Based on the SCADA software Distributed Server
Architecture, a web server bridges the Process Control and Enterprise domains, dynamically
tracking the "pulse" of the enterprise. Web server brings many benefits to the end user:
• Isolation of non-critical enterprise functions from the process control system

• Consolidated business system integration to/from many SCADA software systems
• Consolidation of casual users’ accounts and licenses in one location
• Cross-system reporting
• Minimal engineering requirements
C-17 Digital Video Monitoring

The software may have optional Digital Video Monitoring that integrates digital video controls
and storage with the software to assist in process monitoring. Some of the features are:
• Remote monitoring of unmanned sites

• Integration with SCADA software, providing event-based capture and storage of video
images
• Event-activated, user-activated, and scheduled recording
• Ability to search stored video, based on SCADA software events
• Scalability from 4 cameras to more than 1,000 cameras.
The DVM shall base on open system hardware that digitizes video from standard video cameras
and transports the video to SCADA software clients anywhere on the network for real-time
viewing.

Industry Guidelines
C-18 Integrated Maintenance Management

Integrated Maintenance Management (IMM) delivers computerized maintenance management
system (CMMS) – completely integrated with SCADA software. IMM shall deliver but not
limited to the following key benefits:
• More efficient preventive and predictive maintenance

• Reduced downtime of critical plant equipment
• Effective work scheduling
• Automated creation of work orders from SCADA software events and data values
IMM enables the automated creation, assignment, tracking and closing of maintenance work
orders. If required, work orders can also be manually raised. This is all managed from either
your IMM SQL server database with full access available through the open Web-based interface
of IMM.
C-19 Application Report

The SCADA software shall have the capability to produce but not limited to the following
reports:
• Batch Report
• Downtime analysis
• Schedule maintenance
• Statistical Process & Quality Control (SPQC)
• Event archiving
• Alarm messaging (SMS or pager)
Batch Reporting –integrated reporting of batches process data, to be compiled and archived by
the SCADA software. The batch reports either as a CSV file or Microsoft Excel, if available.
Downtime Analysis –to detect, record and code any equipment breakdowns or process delays to
provide plant downtime analysis. A list of all current downtime events is maintained as well as
the history of previous downtime events, with each assigned a category and a reason code.
Downtime reports may be printed periodically or on-demand, showing downtime duration
sorted by categories and reasons.
Schedule Maintenance –allows supervisory control to schedule at a specified time. The

maintenance report of the equipment is to be reported.
Statistical Process & Quality Control (SPQC) - generates statistical report of average (of
specified time period) of the real-time data collected by the system.
Event Archiving –archiving events logged data by the system that based on sampling frequency
and storage capacity.
Alarm Messaging – reports the alarm messages sent designated supervisors. The report shall
incorporate summary of alarm messages by alarm type and supervisors.

C-20 Application Programming Interface

Application programming interface (API) shall be provided for interfacing with SCADA
software server and the client network based.
The API (programmed in C/C++(visual) or programmed in VB (Visual Basic)) on the server

includes the following functions:
• read and write to control module parameters in the database

• access to historical data
• initiate supervisory control actions
• access to the alarm/event subsystem
• access to user-defined database
• provide a prompt for operator input
• create alarms/events
C-21 User Documentation

SCADA software documentation shall be made available in three basic forms:
• Electronic On-line Documentation using HTML Internet Browser
• On-line Help (F1 function key from within applications)
• Printed documentation
C-22 Specifications and Sizing

The basic SCADA client/server software shall follow the basic specifications as shown in Table
C.1.
Table C.1: Specifications for SCADA Software Client/Server Workstation
Components Specifications
Basic Client/Server Workstation
Processor Processor (Latest version)
Memory 1 GB
Hard Disk Size 200 GB
Display Resolution 1024 x 768, 65K colors
Operating System (Minimum) Microsoft Windows (Latest edition)
Network Protocols TCP/IP; or other as specified in the above
documents

Industry Guidelines
The SCADA software server shall perform according to the specification provided in Table C.2.
Table C.2: Performance of SCADA Software Server
Operational Display Update Performance

Maximum Continuous Display Update Rate 1 sec
Typical Field Change to Display Update Time with 100 Parameters Per
< 2 sec
Display on a Single Station/Server
Typical Display Call Up Time with 100 Parameters on a Single
Station/Server (call up time is dependent on display complexity; this < 2 sec
excludes the first initial call up)
The storage capacity of the hard disk shall provide sufficient capacity to store not less than the
90 days with sampling frequency of 1,500 retrieved data per minutes on 24 hrs/day x 7
days/week basis as detailed out in Table C.3 below.
Table C.3: Sizing of SCADA Storage
Standard Default Minimum Default # Maximum

Sampling Rate Duration Samples Duration
1 minutes 24 hours 1,500 90 days
The back up system shall comprise of the any of the followings:

a. DVD RW (+/-) drive;
b. Tap drive;
c. External hard disk with 12-months storage of the above sampling frequency and points;
d. Other storage devices acceptable by client.

Attachment C - 1: Color Coding for Equipment Status

Status / Alarm Color &/ Blinking Status Notes of Event
Event State
Running Green (Non-Blinking) Equipment is in operating status
Standby Red (Non-Blinking) Equipment is in standby operating

status
Off Red (Blinking) Equipment is "Off" or "Manual" mode.
Trip Amber (Blinking): Equipment "Tripped" due to the

followings reasons:
1) ELR detection;
2) PSR detection;
3) Over-current;
4) Over-heated motor;
5) MCB Trip;
SP High Level Yellow (Non-Blinking) Alarm event of high level than set point
SP Low Level Light Blue (Non-Blinking) Alarm event of lower level than set
point
Transmitter Hi Yellow (Blinking) Alarm event due to transmitter high
(<=4mA) value.
Transmitter Lo Light Blue (Blinking) Alarm event due to transmitter low

(<=4mA) value.
Time Out Amber (Blinking) Alarm due to time out by PLC timer or
other timer.

Industry Guidelines
Appendix C-2: SCADA Control and Monitoring Function Requirement

Description of Analog (A)/
Digital (D)
Item
Description of Monitoring Point Control Point
(For Each Equipment) (For Each SCADA Control / Monitoring
Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Instrumentation Panel
Instrumentation Panel - Local Indicator 1 1
Instrumentation Panel - Remote Indicator 1 1
Instrumentation Panel - Battery Low Indicator 1 1
TNB Power (kWh meter) Data Record 1 1
PLC System
PLC (battery Low) Measure 1 1 Alarm Low (Fault Report)
Battery Charger Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Penstock
Penstock Panel: Manual Switch Indicator 1 1
Penstock Panel: Auto Switch Indicator 1 1
IP open close RTU via RS-485 Serial Link
Penstock Position Actuator (%) 1
control Alarm - High torque
Penstock - Fully Open Indicator 1 1
Penstock - Fully Close Indicator 1 1
Penstock - To Open / To Close Remote Control 1 1
Penstock - UPS Low Indicator 1 1
UPS (battery Low) Inlet Penstock Measure 1 1
Primary Coarse Screen

Screen - Run Indicator 1 1 Counter - Number of start / stop
Screen - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Screen - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1
Screen - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Screen - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Reset of Hour-
Screen - Run-hour record 0 Software counter running hours
Run meter
Control Start / Stop operation by diff.
Differential Level : Upstream Indicator 1 1
level
Differential Level : Downstream Indicator 1 1 Ref level for upstream.
RSP Pumps
Pump - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Pump - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Pump - Off (MCCB) Indicator 1 1 Record non-operation hours
Remote Start /
Pump - To Start / Stop 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Pump - Run-hour record 0 Software counter running hours
Run meter
Pump - Ampere Reading 1 1 Record when operation
Pump - Voltage Reading 1 1 Record when operation
Pump - Soft Starter Amp/Volt Parameters
1 1 RJ45 / RS485
Comm. Setting / Review


(continued)
Digital (D)
Item

Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Float level for RSP Pumps
Level
US Level 1 1
measurement
Float Level - L0 On/Off Indicator 1 1 Cut-off operation
Float Level - L1 On/Off Indicator 1 1 Control Start / Stop operation by diff. level
Float Level - L0 Fault Indicator 1 1 For fault identification (Alarm Fault report)
Sump Pump / Dewatering Pump

Pump - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Pump - Run-hour record 0 Software counter running hours
Run meter
Ampere / Volmeters
Pump - Ampere Reading 1 1 Record when operation
Pump - Voltage Reading 1 1 Record when operation
Float level
Float Level - L0: ON / OFF Indicator 1 1 Cut-off operation
Float Level - L1: ON / OFF Indicator 1 1 Control Start / Stop operation by diff. level
Float Level - L0 Fault Indicator 1 1 For fault identification
Float Level - L1 Fault Indicator 1 1 For fault identification
Secondary Fine Screen

Screen - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Screen - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Screen - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1
Screen - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Screen - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Reset of Hour-
Screen - Run-hour record 0 Software counter running hours
Run meter
Mechanical Differential Level :
Indicator 1 1 Control Start / Stop operation by diff. level
Upstream
Mechanical Differential Level :
Indicator 1 1 Ref level for upstream.
Downstream

Industry Guidelines

(continued)
Digital (D)
Item

Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Screenings Conveyor
Screen c/v - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Screen c/v - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Screen c/v - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1
Screen c/v - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Screen c/v - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Reset of Hour- Software counter / Interlock with screen
Screen c/v - Run-hour record 0
Run meter operation with delay off.
Screenings Wash Water Pumps

Wash-water Pump - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Wash-water Pump - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Wash-water Pump - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1
Wash-water Pump - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Wash-water Pump - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Wash-water Pump - Run-hour record 0
Grit / Grease System

Grit Blower - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Grit Blower - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Grit Blower - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1
Grit Blower - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Grit Blower - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Reset of Hour- Software counter / software Timer control
Grit Blower - Run-hour record 0
Run meter operation by rotation.
Grit Pump : On Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Grit Pump : Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Grit Pump - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Grit Pump - Run-hour record 0
Grit Classifier : On Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Grit Classifier : Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Grit Classifier - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Grit Classifier - Run-hour record 0
Grit Auger : On Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Grit Auger : Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Grit Auger - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Grit Auger - Run-hour record 0
Grit Drum Screen : On Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop

Grit Drum Screen : Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Grit Drum Screen - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Grit Drum Screen - Run-hour record 0


(continued)
Analog (A)/
Description of Digital (D)
Description of
Item
Control Point
Monitoring Point (For Each SCADA Control / Monitoring
Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
(For Each Equipment)
Auxiliary
LV System
Main LV Board Main Breaker : ON Indicator 1 1 Status
Main LV Board Main Breaker :
Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
TRIP (Earth Fault)
TRIP (Over Current)
Reading 1 1 Record
Ampere
Reading 1 1 Record
Voltage
Room Temperature Monitoring /
Reading 1 1
Alarm
Bus Couple : ON Indicator 1 1
Bus Couple : OFF Indicator 1 1
kWHr Meter: Reading 1 1 Record
HT System
HT Income Panel VCB : ON Indicator 1 1 Status
HT Income Panel VCB: TRIP (Earth
Fault)
HT Income Panel VCB: TRIP (Over
Current)
HT Income Panel VCB: Ampere Reading 1 1 Record
HT Income Panel VCB: Voltage Reading 1 1 Record
Battery Charger Indicator 1 1 Record (Alarm fault)
Battery Low Indicator 1 1 Record (Alarm Low)
Room Temperature Monitoring /
Reading 1 1 Record / Alarm (High)
Alarm
kWHr Meter Reading 1 1 Record
Transformer System
Transformer Temperature Alarm Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (High)
Transformer Pressure Alarm Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (High)
CO2 System
TNB Room: CO2 Panel Activated Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (activated)
Switch Gear: CO2 Panel Activated Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (activated)
Transformer Room: CO2 Panel
Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (activated)
Activated
Main Switch Room: CO2 Panel
Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (activated)
Activated
MCC Room: CO2 Panel Activated Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (activated)
Gen Set- CO2 Panel Activated Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (activated)
CO2 Panel DC supply Battery Low Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (activated)

Industry Guidelines
Appendix B: SCADA Control and Monitoring Function Requirement

(continued)
Digital (D)
Item

Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Gen Set System
Gen Set - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Gen Set - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Remote Start /
Gen Set - To Start / Stop (Remote) 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Remote Start /
Gen Set - To Stop (Remote) 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Gen Set - Run-hour record 1 Software counter running hours
Run meter
Gen Set -Battery Charge Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (Fault)
Gen Set -DC Battery Low Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (Low)
Gen Set -Diesel Fuel oil low Indicator 1 1 Record / Alarm (Low)
Surge Vessel Compressors System

Air Compressor - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Air Compressor - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Air Compressor - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1
Air Compressor - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Air Compressor - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Reset of Hour-
Air Compressor - Run-hour record 0 Software counter running hours
Run meter
Surge Vessel Level Indicator Level Measure 1 1
Pressure
Surge Vessel Pressure Indicator 1 1
Measure
Force Ventilation: Grit System

Fan : Manual Indicator 1 1
Fan : Auto Indicator 1 1
Fan : ON / OFF Indicator 1 1 Status & Software counter running hours
Fan : Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Remote Start /
Fan : To Start / Stop 1 1
Stop
Gas Scrubber System

Scrubber Fan : Manual Indicator 1 1
Scrubber Fan : Auto Indicator 1 1
Scrubber Fan : ON / OFF Indicator 1 1 Status & Software counter running hours
Scrubber Fan : Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Remote Start /
Scrubber Fan : To Start / Stop 1 1
Stop
Aeration Blower
Blower - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Blower - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Blower - Off (MCCB) Indicator 1 1 Record non-operation hours
Remote Start /
Blower - To Start / Stop 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Blower - VSD Parameters Speed Control 1 1 RTU via RS-485 Serial Link
Blower - Run-hour record 0
Blower - Ampere Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Blower - Voltage Measure 1 1 Record when operation


(continued)
Item
Description of Monitoring Point Control Point Digital (D)

Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Temperature Sensor
Blower - Temperature Measure 1 1 Record & Alarm (High Temp)
Air Flow Meter
Air Flow Meter Measure 1 1 Record & Alarm (low level)
Force Ventilation: Blower Room

Fan : ON / OFF Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Fan : Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Remote Start /
Stop
Fan : Run-Hour record 1
D.O. Meter
D.O. Meter Measure 1 1 Record / Control Speed & Alarm (Low)
Anoxic Mixer
Anoxic Mixer - Run Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Anoxic Mixer - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Anoxic Mixer - Off (MCCB) Indicator 1 1 Record non-operation hours
Remote Start /
Anoxic Mixer - To Start / Stop 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Anoxic Mixer - Run-hour record 0 Software counter
Run meter
Anoxic Mixer - Ampere Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Anoxic Mixer - Voltage Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Primary or Secondary Clarifier

Clarifier - Run Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Clarifier - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Clarifier - Off (MCCB) Indicator 1 1 Record non-operation hours
Remote Start /
Clarifier - To Start / Stop 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Clarifier - Run-hour record 0 Software counter
Run meter
Clarifier - Ampere Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Clarifier - Voltage Measure 1 1 Record when operation
RAS or WAS Pumps

Pump - Run Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Pump - Run-hour record 0 Software counter
Run meter
Pump - Ampere Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Pump - Volt Measure 1 1 Record when operation

Industry Guidelines

(continued)
Digital (D)
Item

Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Sludge Flow Meter
RAS/WAS Flow Rate Meter Measure 1 1 Record
RAS/WAS Flow Rate Totalizer Measure 1 1 Record
Flow Meter System

Flow Meter
Measure 1 1 Record
(Data record of flow rate)
Flow Meter (Totalizer) Measure / Reset 1 1 SCADA Software Accumulator
14 Gravity Thickener
G. Thickener - Run Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
G. Thickener - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
G. Thickener - Off (MCCB) Indicator 1 1 Record non-operation hours
Remote Start /
G. Thickener - To Start / Stop 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Reset of Hour-
G. Thickener - Run-hour record 0 Software record of running hours
Run meter
G. Thickener - Ampere Measure 1 1 Record when operation
G. Thickener - Voltage Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Thickened Sludge Digester Feed

Pump: Primary & Secondary
Feed Pump - Run Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Feed Pump - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Feed Pump - Off (MCCB) Indicator 1 1 Record non-operation hours
Remote Start /
Feed Pump - To Start / Stop 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Feed Pump - Run-hour record 0 Software record of running hours
Run meter
Feed Pump - Ampere Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Feed Pump - Voltage Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Speed control : RTU via RS-485 Serial
Feed Pump - VSD Parameters Speed Control 1 1
Link
Sludge Flow Meter

Sludge Feed Flow Rate Meter Measure 1 1 Record
Sludge Feed Flow Rate Totalizer Measure 1 1 Record
Gas Blower
Gas Blower - Run Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Gas Blower - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Gas Blower - Off (MCCB) Indicator 1 1 Record non-operation hours
Remote Start /
Gas Blower - To Start / Stop 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Remote Start / Speed control : RTU via RS-485 Serial
Gas Blower - VSD Parameters 1 1
Stop Link
Reset of Hour-
Gas Blower - Run-hour record 0 Software record of running hours
Run meter
Gas Blower - Ampere Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Gas Blower - Voltage Measure 1 1 Record when operation


(continued)
Item
Description of Monitoring Point Control Point Digital (D)

Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Temperature Sensor
Gas Blower - Temperature Measure 1 1 Record & Alarm (High)
Gas Flow Meter
Gas Flow Meter Measure 1 1 Record
Digester Gas Detector Meters

H2S Meter at Dewatering House Measure 1 1 Record & Alarm (Detection & Fault)
Methane Gas Meter Measure 1 1 Record & Alarm (Detection & Fault)
PVRV Sensor Meter Measure 1 1 Record & Alarm (High-Low & Fault)
Internal Digester Gas Analyzer Measure 1 1 Record & Report
Floating Roof Gas Holder

Floating Roof Level Measure 1 1 Record & Alarm (High-Low & Fault)
High Lever Alarm Indicator 1 1 Alarm (High)
Low Lever Alarm Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Low)
PVRV Sensor Meter Measure Record & Alarm (High-Low & Fault)
Gas Flare System

Gas Control Actuator Valve: Full
Indicator 1 1 Record & Timer
Open
Gas Control Actuator Valve: Full
Indicator 1 1 Record & Timer
Close
Gas Control Actuator Valve: Manual Indicator 1 1
Gas Control Actuator Valve: Auto Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Gas Control Actuator Valve: ON Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Gas Control Actuator Valve: TRIP Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Gas Control Actuator Valve: To Remote Start /
1 1 Software control / PLC
Turn Clockwise Stop
Gas Control Actuator Valve: To Remote Start /
Turn Counter-Clockwise Stop
Pilot Light Igniter Indicator 1 1 Record & Alarm (flame distinguished)

Flare Igniter : Manual Indicator 1 1
Flare Igniter : Auto Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Flare Igniter : ON Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Flare Indicator Indicator 1 1 Record & Alarm (flame distinguished)
Pressure Indicator: Inlet Measure 1 1 Record & Report Fault

Pressure Indicator: Discharge Measure 1 1 Record & Report Fault
Sludge Feed Pump to Belt Press

Belt Press Feed Pump - Manual Indicator 1 1
Belt Press Feed Pump - Auto Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Belt Press Feed Pump - Run Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Belt Press Feed Pump - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Belt Press Feed Pump - Off (MCCB) Indicator 1 1 Record non-operation hours
Belt Press Feed Pump - To Start / Remote Start /
Stop Stop
Belt Press Feed Pump - Run-hour Reset of Hour-
0 Software record of running hours
record Run meter
Belt Press Feed Pump - Ampere Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Belt Press Feed Pump - Voltage Measure 1 1 Record when operation
Belt Press Feed Pump - VSD Speed control : RTU via RS-485 Serial
Speed Control 1 1
Parameters Link

Industry Guidelines

(continued)
Digital (D)
Item

Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Belt Press Compressors System
Air Compressor - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Air Compressor - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Air Compressor - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Air Compressor - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Air Compressor - To Start / Stop /
Remote Control 1 1 Software control / PLC
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Air Compressor - Run-hour record 0 Software counter running hours
Run meter
Sludge Cake Conveyor

Screen c/v - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Screen c/v - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Screen c/v - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Screen c/v - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Screen c/v - To Start / Stop / Stop Remote Control 1 1
Screen c/v - Run-hour record 0
Belt Backwash Washwater Pumps

Washwater Pump - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Washwater Pump - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Washwater Pump - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Washwater Pump - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Washwater Pump - To Start / Stop /
Stop
Washwater Pump - Run-hour record 0
Polymer Preparation Unit

Polymer Mixing - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop
Polymer Mixing - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Polymer Mixing - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Polymer Mixing - Manual Mode Indicator 1 1
Polymer Mixing - To Start / Stop Remote Control 1 1 Software control / PLC
Polymer Mixing - Run-hour record 0
Polymer Dilution Skid - Run Indicator 1 1 Record number of Start / stop

Polymer Dilution Skid - Trip Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Polymer Dilution Skid - Auto Mode Indicator 1 1 Program Control operation
Polymer Dilution Skid - Manual
Indicator 1 1
Mode
Polymer Dilution Skid - To Start /
Stop
Polymer Dilution Skid - Run-hour Reset of Hour- Software counter / Interlock with screen
0
record Run meter operation with delay off.


(continued)
Digital (D)
Item

Qty
AO
DO
AI
DI
Equipment)
Force Ventilation: Sludge Feed &
Dewatering Room
Fan : Run Indicator 1 1 Status & counter no. of start / stop
Fan : Off Indicator 1 1 Alarm (Fault Report)
Remote Start /
Stop
Reset of Hour-
Fan : Run-Hour record 1 Software record of running hours
Run meter
Notes:
AI = Analog Input; AO = Analog Output; DI = Digital Input; DO = Digital Output
Qty = Quantity

Industry Guidelines
Attachment C - 3: Representation of SCADA Control Symbols

PUMPS & AERATION DEVICES
EQUPIMENT OFF MODE ON MODE
PUMPS
(Centrifugal)
PUMPS
(Progressive Cavity)
BLOWER
SURFACE AREATOR

ACCESSORIES & FITTINGS
EQUIPMENT OFF MODE ON MODE
Valves
(General)
BUTTERFLY VALVE
AGITATOR
CONVEYORS
CONVEYORS SCREW

Industry Guidelines
OTHERS
EQUIPMENT SYMBOLS
PLC CONTROLLER
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
SCADA WORKSTATION
POWER TRANSMISSION
METER
COMPRESSOR
TANK

PUMPS COMPRESSORS, BLOWERS AND FAN
SYMBOLS DETAILS SYMBOLS DETAILS
Rotary pump 1 Fan or single compressor
Fan
Rotary pump 2
Rotary compressor
Centrifugal pump
Rotary compressor 2
Positive displacement
rotary pump
Centrifugal compressor
In-line pump (axial flow)
Positive displacement Compressor (reciprocrating)

pump (reciprocating)
Motorised blower
Reciprocating pump
Axial flow fan 1

Submersible pump
Axial flow fan 2

Process pump (fluid)
Process pump (air) Selectable fan 1
Screw process pump

Selectable fan 2
Cetrifugal fan 2
Centrifugal pump
(submerged section)
Macerator
Progressive cavity pump

Industry Guidelines
VESSELS AND TANK CLARIFIER SCRAPPER

M
Drum or simple vessel Fixed bridge scrapper
M
Open tank basic symbol
Rotary bridge scrapper
Open tank
SCREENS AND FILTERS
SYMBOLS DETAILS
Clarifier
Rotary screen
Closed tank basic symbol
Mechanical rake bar

screen
Sealed tank
M
Hand rake screen 1
Covered tank
Hand rake screen 2
Tank with fixed roof

(with draw-off sump ) Filter 1
Tank with floating roof Filter 2

(with roof drain)
Rotary filter
Gas holder
Gas storage drum Dust filter
Gas storage bottle
Water surfaces
Carrying vessel

GENERAL
Hopper/Silo
M Aeration cone (with vibrator) 1
M
Brush aerator
Hopper/Silo
(with vibrator) 2
Diffusers X
Submersible aerator
Vibrator (with motor)
Ejector/injector
Fluid separator
CONVEYORS AND FEEDERS
SYMBOLS DETAILS Cyclone 1
Conveyor
Cyclone 2
Inclined conveyor
(with chevrons)
Centrifuge 1
Screw conveyor
Centrifuge 2
Conveyor tube
Dryer
Reversing conveyor
Overhead conveyor Hoist
Scraper conveyor
Electrical motor
Conveyor wheel Spray
Spray Device
Feeder
Spray Nozzle
Screw feeder

Industry Guidelines
GENERAL VALVES
Stirring Device In-line (float operated) 1
Fan blade
In-line (float operated) 2
Triple fan blade
Flange
Rotary Movement
Butterfly
Cooling tower 1
Globe
Cooling tower 2
Ball
Wedge gate
Cooling tower 3
Parallel slide
Oil separator
Needle
Electrical heater Diaphragm 1
Diaphragm 2
MIXERS
Plug 1
SYMBOLS DETAILS
Plug 2
Mixer 1 3-way plug valve
MF
Mixer 2 Powered valve
Reducing valve
M Mixer 3 Mixing valve
Valve manifold

PIPELINE VALVES
SYMBOL DETAILS SYMBOL DETAILS

Major flow line
In-line (any type or pattern )/Gate
Minor flow line
In-line (simple screw down)/
Existing pipeline screw down
Angle (simple screw down)/
Underground or concealed pipeline angle
Existing pipeline (to be removed) Relief (in-line)/relief 1
Future pipeline Relief (in-line)/relief 2
VALVES: ACTUATING METHODS

Relief (angle, pressure)
SYMBOL DETAILS
Manual isolation Relief (angle, vacuum)
Power signal
Check (non-return or reflux ) 1
Statically loaded
Check (non-return or reflux ) 2
Spring loaded
Check (non-return or reflux )
screw down
Weight loaded
Stop check valve
Float control 3-way
Diaphragm
4-way
Solenoid
Automatic actuating element
H Automatic actuating element, with

integral manual actuating element
H
Manual actuating element
M
Motor

Industry Guidelines
Appendix D
Duty and Standby Requirements
Appendix D Duty and Standby Requirements
Table D.1 Duty and Standby Requirements for Activated Sludge

Systems (Utilising Diffused Aeration)
Table D.2 Duty and Standby Requirements for Activated Sludge
Systems (Utilising Mechanical Surface Aerator)
Table D.3 Duty and Standby Requirements for Rotating Biological
Contactor Systems
Table D.4 Duty and Standby Requirements for Trickling Filter Systems


Treatment Plant


Treatment Plant


Treatment Plant
Appendix E
Glossary of Abbreviations
Appendix F – Glossary Abbreviations
Glossary of Abbreviations
ABF Activated Biofilter

AL Aerated Lagoon
AS Activated Sludge
ATU Allyl Thio Urea
BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand
BOD5 Total Five Day Biochemical Oxygen Demand
CAS Conventional Activated Sludge
CF Certificate of Fitness
CMAL Complete Mixed Aerated Lagoon
CMAS Conventional Mode Activated Sludge
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand
CPR Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation
DMF Dual Media Filtration
DO Dissolved Oxygen
DOE Department of Environment
DOSH Department of Occupational Safety and Health
DS Deep Shaft
EA Extended Aeration
EAMAS Extended Aeration Mode Activated Sludge
F/M Food to Microorganism ratio
FAL Facultative Aeration Lagoon
FWSP Facultative Waste Stabilisation Ponds
GRP Glass Reinforced Plastic
HAZOP Hazard and Operability Review
HRT Hydraulic Retention Time
HRTF High Rate Trickling Filter
MCRT Mean Cell Residence Time
MLSS Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
MLVSS Mixed Liquor Volatile Suspended Solids
MOD Modified Oxidation Ditch
MP Maturation Pond

Appendix F – Glossary Abbreviations
MS 1228 Malaysian Standard 1228: Code of Practice for Design and

Installation of Sewerage Systems
OD Oxidation Ditch
OP Oxidation Pond
OASH Occupational Safety and Health Act
PE Population Equivalent
Qavg Average Flow
Qpeak Peak Flow
QRAS Return Activated Sludge Flow
RAS Return Activated Sludge
RBC Rotating Biological Contactor
SBC Submerged Biological Contactor
SBR Sequential batch Reactor
SIRIM Standards and Industrial Research Institute of Malaysia
SS Suspended Solids
SPAN Suruhanjaya Perkhidmatan Air Negara (National Water
Services Commission)
SST Secondary Settlement Tank
STP Sewage Treatment Plant
TDH Total Dynamic Head
TF Trickling Filter
TOL Total Organic Load
VSS Volatile Suspended Solids
WAS Waste Activated Sludge

Treatment Plant
Malaysian Sewerage
Industry Guidelines
Suruhanajaya Perkhidmatan Air Negara (SPAN)

Kementerian Tenaga, Air dan Komunikasi
Block E4/5 Parcel E
Pusat Pentadbiran Kerajaan
62668 Putrajaya Malaysia
Tel: 03-8883 6000 Fax: 03-8889 3712

http://www.ktak.gov.my
e-mail : webmaster@ktak.gov.my

Malaysia Sewerage Industry Guideline Volume 4

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Malaysia Sewerage Industry Guideline Volume 4

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

First Edition

Volume 1 - Sewerage Policy for New Developments

Dato’ Teo Yen Hua

All rights reserved.

This publication is protected by copyright.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, distributed, transmitted, stored in a retrieval

Changes may be made periodically to the information herein.

Table 1.1 Recommended Population Equivalent 4

Section 2 Design Overview

Table 2.1 Classification by Treatment Plant Capacity 12

Table 3.1 Design Influent Values 24

Section 4 Requirements for Physical Design

Table 4.1 Modulation Requirements 32

Section 5 Requirements for Individual Treatment Processes

Table 5.1 Requirement for Inlet Chamber 72

Figure 5.19 Chemical-feed system schematic 116

Section 6 Requirements for Ancillary Facilities

Section 7 Special Requirements

Section 8 Package Sewage Treatment Plant

Appendix C Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA)

Appendix D Duty and Standby Requirements

Appendix E Glossary of Abbreviations

1.1 Purpose of This Volume

a) An overview of considerations and criteria for sewage treatment

1.2 Who Should Use This Volume

This volume is primarily for owners, developers, consulting engineers and

1.3 Related Reference Material

However, the information in this volume shall take precedence over

Sewage Treatment Plants Volume 4 1

The procedures for certification of sewerage services are given in the

All Standards references adopted during this revision exercise are

1.4 General Planning and Design Approval Requirements

The application procedures for sewage treatment plant approval shall

2 Volume 4 Malaysian Sewerage

l) Point of discharge of treated effluent (effluent outfall) and

x) Clean and legible detailed drawings in standard format

1.5 Guidelines for Design Calculations

a) Sizing of each unit processes and all mechanical equipment

Sewage Treatment Plants Volume 4 3

Table 1.1 - Recommended Population Equivalent

Type of Premises/Establishment Population Equivalent

4 Volume 4 Malaysian Sewerage

Table 1.1 - Recommended Population Equivalent (Cont)

Type of Premises/Establishment Population Equivalent

1.6 Guidelines for Drawings

a) Overall development plan showing the whole sewerage system and

Sewage Treatment Plants Volume 4 5

It provides key details of each piece of equipment, tank, piping,

6 Volume 4 Malaysian Sewerage

Figure 1.1 – Typical Hydrolic Profile

-0.4m HIGHEST FLOOD WATER LEVEL

Sewage Treatment Plants Volume 4 Page 7

Figure 1.2 - Typical Process and Instrumentation Diagram

FROM PRELIMINARY LC LD001 LD002 LC

XXX001 D AD001 XXX001 D PN001 XXX001 D PN002 XXX001 D AD002

GF007 FE003 FG001

XXX001 D AC001 XXX001 D AC002 XXX001 D AC003

8 Volume 4 Malaysian Sewerage

Figure 1.3 Typical Process Flow Diagram

Sewage Treatment Plants Volume 4 9

Figure 1.4 – Typical Mass Balance Diagram

NO.1 (2.4kW) Using 4c x 2.5mm ARM Cable

NO.2 (2.4kW) Using 4c x 2.5mm ARM Cable

RAW SEWAGE SUBMERSIBLE PUMP